Implementations in academic year 2021 - 2022

•   Academic Communication 3B00DW79-3004 06.09.2021-31.12.2021  3 cr  (20IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course deals with academic communication in sufficient depth and detail to enable students to present research work and write reports in academic style, as may be required for other courses in this degree programm. Most of the topics covered will also be relevant to writing a final thesis, so this course can be considered as a basic introduction to that process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Demonstrate familiarity with the principles of academic communication.
  Access and critically evaluate relevant source materials.
  Get familiar with the concept of plagiarism and know how to avoid it in their own work.
  Incorporate in-text references to source materials and compile a list of sources, following TAMK requirements.
  Produce academic texts which meet set criteria: clear, accurate and formal English, coherent structure.
  Present constructive and well-justified verbal arguments and feedback in formal, face-to-face academic settings, such as seminars and public lectures.
  Utilize resources and learning strategies to develop their own communication skills independently.

  Course contents

  What are the key features of academic communication and how does it differ from organizational communication?
  What are the roles of verbal and written communication in the academic context?
  What norms and standards must academic writing meet?
  What stages must a a writer process to produce an academic text?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student communicates in comprehensible English overall and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text. References to source materials are included where appropriate.

  Good

  The student's English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets the norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled.

  Excellent

  The student's written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style, reports meet the norms for different types of text. He/she shows ability to access and select appropriate information. References to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways, source materials are expertly paraphrased. Oral expression is fluent and professional.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Recommended or required reading

  Some materials and exercises will be provided during the course. Authentic online materials will be used as well.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lectures, online activities including video conferences. Collaborative learning coupled with online exercises, Reading and analyzing academic text, producing academic text.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  This course emphasizes academic writing and the evaluation is based on a 0-5 grading scale where 0 fails and 5 is excellent. Active participation in class and online collaborative platforms are required. To get a minimum pass, students need to submit an essay using TAMK's template written in an academic style. There should be evidence of source materials used and in-text and list of references included in accordance with TAMK's recommendations.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  06.09.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Accreditation

  Exam schedule

  An academic essay and a research report replace exam.

  International connections

  Collaboration with Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences.

  Students use of time and load

  Student will devote his/her time in research and writing/ producing academic text.

  Content periodicity

  Literature based essay (Individual task) and Research based report (Collaborative task, Team work, optional)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has not attended the minimum number of lessons and has not provided any evidence of illness to justify their absence. Participation in lessons and online forums is not significant. In addition, the student has not submitted the final essay.

  Satisfactory

  Satisfactory (1-2):
  The student has attended the minimum lessons of 80%. He/she communicates in comprehensible English on the whole and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text; references to source materials are included where appropriate. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines, the use of TAMK's thesis template and the report guide etc. are minimally fulfilled.

  Good

  Good: (3-4)
  The student has attained at least, 80% of attendance. His/her English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled. The student has used multiple sources of academic writers in his/her work accurately in accordance with TAMK's report guide. The report/essay has been written using the thesis template.

  Excellent

  Excellent (5)
  Students’ written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style; reports meet norms for different types of text; students show the ability to access and select appropriate information; references to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways; source materials are expertly paraphrased. The student has used multiple sources of academic writers in his/her work accurately in accordance with TAMK's report guide. Oral expression is fluent and professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are consistently fulfilled.

•   Academic Communication 3B00DW79-3005 10.09.2021-31.12.2021  3 cr  (20IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course deals with academic communication in sufficient depth and detail to enable students to present research work and write reports in academic style, as may be required for other courses in this degree programm. Most of the topics covered will also be relevant to writing a final thesis, so this course can be considered as a basic introduction to that process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Demonstrate familiarity with the principles of academic communication.
  Access and critically evaluate relevant source materials.
  Get familiar with the concept of plagiarism and know how to avoid it in their own work.
  Incorporate in-text references to source materials and compile a list of sources, following TAMK requirements.
  Produce academic texts which meet set criteria: clear, accurate and formal English, coherent structure.
  Present constructive and well-justified verbal arguments and feedback in formal, face-to-face academic settings, such as seminars and public lectures.
  Utilize resources and learning strategies to develop their own communication skills independently.

  Course contents

  What are the key features of academic communication and how does it differ from organizational communication?
  What are the roles of verbal and written communication in the academic context?
  What norms and standards must academic writing meet?
  What stages must a a writer process to produce an academic text?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student communicates in comprehensible English overall and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text. References to source materials are included where appropriate.

  Good

  The student's English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets the norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled.

  Excellent

  The student's written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style, reports meet the norms for different types of text. He/she shows ability to access and select appropriate information. References to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways, source materials are expertly paraphrased. Oral expression is fluent and professional.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Recommended or required reading

  Some materials and exercises will be provided during the course. Authentic online materials will be used as well.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lectures, online activities including video conferences. Collaborative learning coupled with online exercises, Reading and analyzing academic text, producing academic text.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  This course emphasizes on academic writing and the evaluation is based on 0-5 grading scale where 0 is fail and 5 is excellent. Active participation in class and online collaborative platforms are required. To get a minimum pass, student need to get at least minimum of 6 points accumulated through attending sessions and doing exercises, and, at least one submitted essay.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  10.09.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Accreditation

  Exam schedule

  An academic essay and a research report replace exam.

  International connections

  Collaboration with Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences.

  Students use of time and load

  Student will devote his/her time in research and writing/ producing academic text.

  Content periodicity

  Literature based essay (Individual task) and Research based report (Collaborative task, Team work, optional)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has not attended the minimum number of lessons and has not provided any evidence of ilness to justify their absence.

  Satisfactory

  Satisfactory (1-2):
  The student has attended the minimum lessons of 80%. He/she communicates in comprehensible English on the whole and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text; references to source materials are included where appropriate. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are minimally fulfilled.

  Good

  Good: (3-4)
  The student has attained at least, 80% of attendance. His/her English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled. The student has used multiple source of academic writers in his/her work accurately in accordance with TAMK's report guide.

  Excellent

  Excellent (5)
  Students’ written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style; reports meet norms for different types of text; students show ability to access and select appropriate information; references to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways; source materials are expertly paraphrased. The student has used multiple source of academic writers in his/her work accurately in accordance with TAMK's report guide.Oral expression is fluent and professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are consistently fulfilled.

•   Academic Communication 3B00DW79-3007 11.01.2022-04.06.2022  3 cr  (20IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course deals with academic communication in sufficient depth and detail to enable students to present research work and write reports in academic style, as may be required for other courses in this degree programm. Most of the topics covered will also be relevant to writing a final thesis, so this course can be considered as a basic introduction to that process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Demonstrate familiarity with the principles of academic communication.
  Access and critically evaluate relevant source materials.
  Get familiar with the concept of plagiarism and know how to avoid it in their own work.
  Incorporate in-text references to source materials and compile a list of sources, following TAMK requirements.
  Produce academic texts which meet set criteria: clear, accurate and formal English, coherent structure.
  Present constructive and well-justified verbal arguments and feedback in formal, face-to-face academic settings, such as seminars and public lectures.
  Utilize resources and learning strategies to develop their own communication skills independently.

  Course contents

  What are the key features of academic communication and how does it differ from organizational communication?
  What are the roles of verbal and written communication in the academic context?
  What norms and standards must academic writing meet?
  What stages must a a writer process to produce an academic text?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student communicates in comprehensible English overall and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text. References to source materials are included where appropriate.

  Good

  The student's English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets the norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled.

  Excellent

  The student's written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style, reports meet the norms for different types of text. He/she shows ability to access and select appropriate information. References to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways, source materials are expertly paraphrased. Oral expression is fluent and professional.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Recommended or required reading

  Some materials and exercises will be provided during the course. Authentic online materials will be used as well.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lectures, online activities including video conferences. Collaborative learning coupled with online exercises, Reading and analyzing academic text, producing academic text.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  This course emphasizes on academic writing and the evaluation is based on a 0-5 grading scale where 0 fails and 5 is excellent. Active participation in class and online collaborative platforms are required. To get a minimum pass, students need to get at least know the technicalities in writing, use the report template correctly, and learn how to reference text correctly in accordance with TAMK's requirement. (see the report guide) and a minimum of 6 points accumulated through attending sessions and doing exercises, and, at least one submitted essay.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  11.01.2022 - 04.06.2022

  Registration

  02.12.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah, Kirjasto,informaatikko Virtuaalihenkilö

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Accreditation

  Exam schedule

  An academic essay and a research report replace an exam. Strictly using TAMK's report template for proper formatting, and using the report guide for the referencing style required by TAMK.

  International connections

  Collaborative research task with Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences.

  Students use of time and load

  Students will devote his/her time to research and writing/ producing academic text.
  Learn to use and edit the report template, become familiar with the report guide.

  Content periodicity

  Literature-based essay (Individual task)
  Progress report
  and Research-based report (Collaborative task, Teamwork)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  Satisfactory (1-2):
  The student has attended the minimum lessons of 80%. He/she communicates in comprehensible English on the whole and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text; references to source materials are included where appropriate. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are minimally fulfilled.

  Good

  Good: (3-4)
  The student has attained at least, 80% of attendance. His/her English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled. The student has used multiple sources of academic writers in his/her work accurately in accordance with TAMK's report guide.

  Excellent

  Excellent (5)
  Students’ written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style; reports meet norms for different types of text; students show the ability to access and select appropriate information; references to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways; source materials are expertly paraphrased. The student has used multiple sources of academic writers in his/her work accurately in accordance with TAMK's report guide. Oral expression is fluent and professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are consistently fulfilled.

•   Advanced Accounting and Finance 3B00DW53-3002 17.01.2022-22.04.2022  6 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course completes the students’ accounting and finance module studies and consists of two parts.
  
  Firstly, the students study and learn about the working capital management concept and theory. Studying this part is linked to understanding of typical corporate life from start-up to growth company – and further on to the mature business phase.
  
  Secondly, a selection of advanced industry-specific and other themes and topics are assigned to the students, enabling them to link their accounting and finance studies to their own favorite industries or some most motivating current themes and topics of today’s business life.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  
  Apply their finance and managerial accounting skills to industry-specific business cases.
  See and analyze the big picture of working capital case-specifically, react immediately when necessary - and initiate business development actions based on the analysis.
  Control the working capital professionally, using performance measures such as current ratio, turnover of inventory, turnovers of accounts receivable and payable, as well as gearing %.
  Calculate the profitability of working capital investment using the net present value (NPV) method.
  Identify the need for using advanced methods such as just-in-time (JIT) management, lean accounting and environmental accounting when necessary.
  Create basic-level cash plans and cash flow forecasts.

  Course contents

  What is the working capital concept, and what is the strategic importance of it?
  What is the working capital cycle, and how can working capital be managed successfully?
  How can cash and inventory processes and balances be improved?
  How can the management of trade receivables and payables as well as cash flows be enhanced?
  What is gearing %, and how can it be used in practice?
  Which industries, current trends and phenomena are potential ones for advanced accounting and finance efforts and applications?
  When is it time for environmental or lean accounting, or e.g. for applying the just-in-time (JIT) method?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of cash management and working capital management, as well as some cash flow and digital finance related industry or case specific applications. He/she can take responsibility for his individual duties in routine cash and working capital management as well as related measurement and reporting activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of applying and explaining the concepts and methods of cash and working capital management as well as performing cash flow and digital finance in related industry or case specific analyses in controllable situations. He/she works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. He/she can solve cash and working capital management problems as well as work on cash flow and digital finance related measurement, reporting and development activities. His/her courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various cash and working capital management problems. He/she can produce cash flow and digital finance related industry or case specific analyses. He/she can apply his extensive knowledge and skills of the subject matter excellently in problem solving, experiments, and when working on cash flow and digital finance related analysis, reporting and business development activities. His/her courses of action are very well justified, and he can work individually, making remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

  Approved/Failed

  The student does not perform in the course exam acceptably, or he/she does not complete the compulsory exercises, assignments and/or other compulsory items on the course agendas acceptably.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Recommended or required reading

  Bhimani, A., Datar, S., Horngren, C.T. & Rajan, M. 2018. Management and Cost Accounting. 7th ed. Harlow, United Kingdom: Pearson Education.
  Especially chapters 13-14.
  ISBN: 9781292232669. EISBN: 9781292232676.
  https://andor.tuni.fi/permalink/358FIN_TAMPO/176jdvt/cdi_askewsholts_vlebooks_9781292232676
  
  Other books and learning material will be informed to the course participants during the course implementation.
  
  In addition, students and the groups of them perform their own data collection, as part of their exercises and group assignments.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Learning discussions, group assignments, exercises, case studies, literature, lecturing.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Student’s overall course grade is based on
  1. the evaluation criteria of this course
  2. active individual participation in the classes and exercises
  3. his/her group assignment performance, including both contribution in the group's own report and action in an opposing team.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  17.01.2022 - 22.04.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 16.01.2022

  Credits

  6 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Seats

  0 - 35

  Teacher(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Further information for students

  Pasi Kuusijärvi, M.Sc. (Econ. & Bus. Adm.), AmO, HHJ
  Senior Lecturer, Accounting and Financial Management
  
  Tampere University of Applied Sciences (TAMK)
  Tampere, Finland
  
  pasi.kuusijarvi@tuni.fi
  Tel. +358 40 846 3052
  www.tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  No, there are not.

  Training and labour cooperation

  A company visit, a guest speaker - or a study trip is possible in the spring 2022 implementation.

  Exam schedule

  No written exam.

  International connections

  Participation in, at least, one guest lecture on TAMK 2022 Intl Week in April 2022 is required.
  
  In addition, the truly international group of students studies together both during the classes at TAMK, and virtually.

  Students use of time and load

  Max. some 160 hours as workload; 18 hours of that as contact teaching.

  Content periodicity

  Studying cash, investment and working capital management forms the first key part of the course, studying digital and sustainable finance the second/last part.
  
  The study process 2022:
  1. Introduction - incl. rehearsal about the liquidity and solvency measures
  2. Cash Budget
  3. Capital Budgeting - incl. especially the Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) methods (NPV, IRR, Payback)
  4. The Cash Flow Statement (both the Indirect and Direct method)
  5. Participation in the TAMK 2022 Intl Week
  6. Working Capital Management - incl. also e.g. the Gearing-% measurement
  7. Digital and Sustainable Finance - as Group assignment.

•   Basics of Financial Accounting 3B00DW03-3008 10.01.2022-06.03.2022  2 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course introduces the basics of financial accounting. Students will learn bookkeeping in virtual companies.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the basic concepts and principles of accounting
  • Record basic business transactions in accounting

  Course contents

  • What are the purposes of accounting and who are the users of accounting information?
  • What is the conceptual framework in accounting?
  • What are the phases of an accounting period?
  • What does double-entry accounting mean?
  • What is accounting equation?
  • How are business transactions recorded in accounting?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting. He/she knows the stages of accounting period and is able to record basic financial transactions using bookkeeping software. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work in individual assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work and recognises and follows the important courses of action in the field.

  Excellent

  The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner and develops his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Recommended or required reading

  The list of recommended litterature is available in course Moodle

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - lectures
  - assignments
  - teamwork

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  10.01.2022 - 06.03.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  ----

  Training and labour cooperation

  ----

  Exam schedule

  Exam week 8/2022 (preliminary)

  Students use of time and load

  2 ECTS, approximately 54 h

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has failed in achieving the objectives of the course.

  Satisfactory

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands fundamentals of financial accounting and knows the basic functions of Fennoa book-keeping program.

  Good

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program at a basic level.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program well at a basic level.

•   Basics of Financial Accounting 3B00DW03-3009 10.01.2022-06.03.2022  2 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course introduces the basics of financial accounting. Students will learn bookkeeping in virtual companies.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the basic concepts and principles of accounting
  • Record basic business transactions in accounting

  Course contents

  • What are the purposes of accounting and who are the users of accounting information?
  • What is the conceptual framework in accounting?
  • What are the phases of an accounting period?
  • What does double-entry accounting mean?
  • What is accounting equation?
  • How are business transactions recorded in accounting?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting. He/she knows the stages of accounting period and is able to record basic financial transactions using bookkeeping software. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work in individual assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work and recognises and follows the important courses of action in the field.

  Excellent

  The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner and develops his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Recommended or required reading

  The list of recommended litterature is available in course Moodle

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - lectures
  - assignments
  - teamwork

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  10.01.2022 - 06.03.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  ----

  Training and labour cooperation

  ----

  Exam schedule

  Exam week 8/2022 (preliminary)

  Students use of time and load

  2 ECTS, approximately 54 h

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has failed in achieving the objectives of the course.

  Satisfactory

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands fundamentals of financial accounting and knows the basic functions of Fennoa book-keeping program.

  Good

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program at a basic level.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program well at a basic level.

•   Basics of International Business 3B00DW11-3008 14.03.2022-31.05.2022  3 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course describes the first steps of the internationalization process of small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs). Students learn to make a basic market analysis of a new target market for a company. Students analyze international marketing environment (macro and micro) of the target country and help the company with their internationalization plan.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Search for market information of a new target market
  • Describe the contents of an international market analysis.
  • Analyze international marketing environment of a target country
  • Apply the knowledge of the market analysis to company’s internationalization plan.
  • Work effectively in a multicultural team.

  Course contents

  • How to find market information of a new target market?
  • What is international market analysis?
  • What are the special features of international marketing environment?
  • What knowledge is needed when entering into a new target country?
  • How to work effectively in a multicultural team?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is familiar with basic concepts of international business. He/she is aware of common export modes. The student knows how to identify factors that indicate potential export markets in order to define market entry modes. The student can identify selected sources of market information and apply that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working in a multicultural team.

  Good

  The student has comprehensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can analyse and select suitable export modes. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating promising export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify a variety of sources of market information and relate that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively in a multicultural team.

  Excellent

  The student has extensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can identify, analyse and select the accurate export modes in a variety of situations. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating strong export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify an extensive variety of sources of market information. He/she can utilize and apply that market information in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively and productively in a multicultural team.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Annikka Lepola

  Recommended or required reading

  The course is based on own, active information search.
  
  Main course book:
  - Cavusgil – Knight – Riesenberg: International Business: The New Realities
  
  Source: Cavusgil, S.T., Knight, G. & Riesenberger, J. (2017). International Business: The New Realities. Global Edition. Pearson Education.
  
  Link to ebook: https://ebookcentral.proquest.com/lib/tampere/detail.action?docID=5186107
  
  Other course books
  - Czinkota – Ronkainen: Principles of International Marketing
  
  Source: Czinkota, M.R. & Ronkainen, I.A. (2010). Principles of International Marketing. 9th ed., international ed. Mason (Ohio): South-Western.
  
  - Blythe: Essentials of Marketing
  
  Source: Blythe, J. (2012). Essentials of Marketing. 5th ed. Harlow, Pearson Education UK.
  
  Link to ebook: https://ebookcentral.proquest.com/lib/tampere/detail.action?docID=513667
  Own active information search

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact lessons and workshops, individual and team learning, international business case team project. The course follows problem-based learning approach.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  14.03.2022 - 31.05.2022

  Registration

  13.12.2021 - 18.03.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Annikka Lepola

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  An internationalization business case project will be conducted for a business company according to their project case briefing.

  Students use of time and load

  The course is 3 credits which is 80 hours of student's work: 1/3 of the time will be used in teacher led workshops and 2/3 hours in independent studying and teamwork.

  Content periodicity

  The course plan will be introduced in the first contact classes.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is familiar with basic concepts of international business. He/she is aware of common export modes. The student knows how to identify factors that indicate potential export markets in order to define market entry modes. The student can identify selected sources of market information and apply that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working in a multicultural team.

  Good

  The student has comprehensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can analyse and select suitable export modes. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating promising export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify a variety of sources of market information and relate that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively in a multicultural team.

  Excellent

  The student has extensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can identify, analyse and select the accurate export modes in a variety of situations. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating strong export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify an extensive variety of sources of market information. He/she can utilize and apply that market information in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively and productively in a multicultural team.

•   Basics of International Business 3B00DW11-3009 14.03.2022-31.05.2022  3 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course describes the first steps of the internationalization process of small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs). Students learn to make a basic market analysis of a new target market for a company. Students analyze international marketing environment (macro and micro) of the target country and help the company with their internationalization plan.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Search for market information of a new target market
  • Describe the contents of an international market analysis.
  • Analyze international marketing environment of a target country
  • Apply the knowledge of the market analysis to company’s internationalization plan.
  • Work effectively in a multicultural team.

  Course contents

  • How to find market information of a new target market?
  • What is international market analysis?
  • What are the special features of international marketing environment?
  • What knowledge is needed when entering into a new target country?
  • How to work effectively in a multicultural team?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is familiar with basic concepts of international business. He/she is aware of common export modes. The student knows how to identify factors that indicate potential export markets in order to define market entry modes. The student can identify selected sources of market information and apply that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working in a multicultural team.

  Good

  The student has comprehensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can analyse and select suitable export modes. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating promising export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify a variety of sources of market information and relate that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively in a multicultural team.

  Excellent

  The student has extensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can identify, analyse and select the accurate export modes in a variety of situations. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating strong export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify an extensive variety of sources of market information. He/she can utilize and apply that market information in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively and productively in a multicultural team.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Annikka Lepola

  Recommended or required reading

  The course is based on own, active information search.
  
  Main course book:
  - Cavusgil – Knight – Riesenberg: International Business: The New Realities
  
  Source: Cavusgil, S.T., Knight, G. & Riesenberger, J. (2017). International Business: The New Realities. Global Edition. Pearson Education.
  
  Link to ebook: https://ebookcentral.proquest.com/lib/tampere/detail.action?docID=5186107
  
  Other course books
  - Czinkota – Ronkainen: Principles of International Marketing
  
  Source: Czinkota, M.R. & Ronkainen, I.A. (2010). Principles of International Marketing. 9th ed., international ed. Mason (Ohio): South-Western.
  
  - Blythe: Essentials of Marketing
  
  Source: Blythe, J. (2012). Essentials of Marketing. 5th ed. Harlow, Pearson Education UK.
  
  Link to ebook: https://ebookcentral.proquest.com/lib/tampere/detail.action?docID=513667
  Own active information search

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact lessons and workshops, individual and team learning, international business case team project. The course follows problem-based learning approach.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  14.03.2022 - 31.05.2022

  Registration

  13.12.2021 - 18.03.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Annikka Lepola

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  An internationalization business case project will be conducted for a business company according to their project case briefing.

  Students use of time and load

  The course is 3 credits which is 80 hours of student's work: 1/3 of the time will be used in teacher led workshops and 2/3 hours in independent studying and teamwork.

  Content periodicity

  The course plan will be introduced in the first contact classes.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is familiar with basic concepts of international business. He/she is aware of common export modes. The student knows how to identify factors that indicate potential export markets in order to define market entry modes. The student can identify selected sources of market information and apply that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working in a multicultural team.

  Good

  The student has comprehensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can analyse and select suitable export modes. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating promising export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify a variety of sources of market information and relate that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively in a multicultural team.

  Excellent

  The student has extensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can identify, analyse and select the accurate export modes in a variety of situations. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating strong export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify an extensive variety of sources of market information. He/she can utilize and apply that market information in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively and productively in a multicultural team.

•   Business Communication in Finnish 3B00DW81-3005 07.03.2022-31.05.2022  2 cr  (20IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Kurssi on tarkoitettu IB:n suomenkielisille opiskelijoille. Kurssilla perehdytään asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin ja harjoitellaan kirjoittamaan työ- ja liike-elämän kirjallisia viestejä, kuten liikekirjeitä ja muistioita. Kurssilla kerrataan ja harjoitellaan myös suomen kielen oikeinkirjoitusta.
  
  Kurssin suoritettuaan, opiskelija:
  
  Osoittaa perehtyneisyyttä asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin.
  Osaa käyttää ja soveltaa asiakirjastandardia alansa tyypillisissä kirjoitteissa.
  Osaa viestiä asiatyylisesti ja vakuuttavasti ottaen huomioon vastaanottajan, tilanteen ja alan käytänteet.
  Ymmärtää oikeakielisyyden merkityksen osana viestinnällistä ammattitaitoaan ja yrityksen imagoa.
  Osaa arvioida ja kehittää viestintäosaamistaan.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Mitkä ovat asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteet?
  Millainen on asiakirjastandardin rakenne ja mitä hyötyä sen hallitsemisesta on?
  Miten laaditaan työ- ja liike-elämän yleisimmät kirjoitteet?
  Mikä on kielenhuollon merkitys työelämässä?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can write business documents and messages according to given instructions and examples. He/she communicates understandably in different situations of his/her own field. The student is able to make good use of the means of communication.

  Good

  The student communicates fluently, understandably and interestingly in different situations of business life. He/she takes the receiver and situation into account in his/her communication. The student can interpret receiver’s action and respond to it by building collaboration e.g. in customer service situations.

  Excellent

  The student communicates in different situations of business life creatively and with great expertise. He/she is able to use the means of communication in many different ways and is able to influence by using language. The student can adjust his/her communication according to the receiver, situation, circumstances (e.g. online communication) and feedback. He/she takes his/her organisation’s values and visions into account in his/her communication.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Mari Touronen

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 31.05.2022

  Registration

  02.12.2021 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  Teacher(s)

  Mari Touronen

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Business Game 3B00DW27-3003 07.09.2021-15.10.2021  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  In this course students operate as a management team of a global company. Management teams come up with a company strategy and make decisions to maximize the profits and company value. Company operations are carried out in a business simulation game in a competitive team environment.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Utilize the role of strategy as a key success factor.
  Explain the interdependence between the different company operations.
  Demonstrate knowledge and skills in financial review, company analysis, and strategy formulation.
  Utilize tools for entrepreneurial thinking.

  Course contents

  What is a role of a strategy to manage a company?
  How does product portfolio, pricing, marketing and product features impact the demand of the product?
  How to analyze company's financial performance and how to impact it?
  How to work as a successful team utilizing each team players' strengths?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student participates in the team work but is able to read the market and company information and utilise that data in decision making if assisted. The student struggles to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome.

  Good

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and completes all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyse the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student participates actively in decision making enabling the improvement of the company status. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company's strategy and value, and answer questions related to these topics.

  Excellent

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and demonstrates a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyses the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company's strategy and the company's value. The student is able to answer various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Material available in Moodle (lectures and business simulation guide)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Learning simulation, lectures, quiz, coaching (using distance learning tools)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  ** Quality of written tasks and ranking and performance in the game (grade 0-5)
  * Final presentation (0-5)
  * Quiz and company audit (pass/fail)
  * Attendance and activity in team work impact the grade

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.09.2021 - 15.10.2021

  Registration

  02.07.2021 - 27.08.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  4 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  ---

  Exam schedule

  The game has several game rounds. The schedule of the rounds will be presented in the first lecture. The course will end with the final presentation.

  Students use of time and load

  4 credit points (27 hours per credit point)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is participating to the team work but has great trouble to read the market and company information and utilize that data in decision making. The student is struggling to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome. The student has done all the required course tasks but the quality of those tasks is inadequate.

  Good

  The student actively participates to the teamwork and returns all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyze the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student shows progress in decision making so that the company's financial status will improve. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company strategy and value and answer to the questions relating those topics.

  Excellent

  The student is actively participating to the teamwork and is demonstrating a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyzes the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company strategy and the company value. The student is able to answer to various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

•   Business Game 3B00DW27-3005 25.10.2021-10.12.2021  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  In this course students operate as a management team of a global company. Management teams come up with a company strategy and make decisions to maximize the profits and company value. Company operations are carried out in a business simulation game in a competitive team environment.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Utilize the role of strategy as a key success factor.
  Explain the interdependence between the different company operations.
  Demonstrate knowledge and skills in financial review, company analysis, and strategy formulation.
  Utilize tools for entrepreneurial thinking.

  Course contents

  What is a role of a strategy to manage a company?
  How does product portfolio, pricing, marketing and product features impact the demand of the product?
  How to analyze company's financial performance and how to impact it?
  How to work as a successful team utilizing each team players' strengths?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student participates in the team work but is able to read the market and company information and utilise that data in decision making if assisted. The student struggles to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome.

  Good

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and completes all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyse the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student participates actively in decision making enabling the improvement of the company status. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company's strategy and value, and answer questions related to these topics.

  Excellent

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and demonstrates a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyses the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company's strategy and the company's value. The student is able to answer various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Material available in Moodle (lectures and business simulation guide)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Learning simulation, lectures, quiz, coaching

  Assessment methods and criteria

  * Performance/ranking in the game
  * Quality of written tasks and ranking
  * Final presentation
  * Quiz and company audit (pass/fail)
  * Attendance and activity in team work impact the grade

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  25.10.2021 - 10.12.2021

  Registration

  02.07.2021 - 10.10.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  ---

  Exam schedule

  The game has several game rounds. The schedule of the rounds will be presented in the first lecture. The course will end with the final presentation.

  Students use of time and load

  4 credit points (27 hours per credit point)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is participating to the team work but has great trouble to read the market and company information and utilize that data in decision making. The student is struggling to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome. The student has done all the required course tasks but the quality of those tasks is inadequate.

  Good

  The student actively participates to the teamwork and returns all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyze the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student shows progress in decision making so that the company's financial status will improve. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company strategy and value and answer to the questions relating those topics.

  Excellent

  The student is actively participating to the teamwork and is demonstrating a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyzes the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company strategy and the company value. The student is able to answer to various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

•   Business Game 3B00DW27-3008 24.01.2022-11.03.2022  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  In this course students operate as a management team of a global company. Management teams come up with a company strategy and make decisions to maximize the profits and company value. Company operations are carried out in a business simulation game in a competitive team environment.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Utilize the role of strategy as a key success factor.
  Explain the interdependence between the different company operations.
  Demonstrate knowledge and skills in financial review, company analysis, and strategy formulation.
  Utilize tools for entrepreneurial thinking.

  Course contents

  What is a role of a strategy to manage a company?
  How does product portfolio, pricing, marketing and product features impact the demand of the product?
  How to analyze company's financial performance and how to impact it?
  How to work as a successful team utilizing each team players' strengths?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student participates in the team work but is able to read the market and company information and utilise that data in decision making if assisted. The student struggles to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome.

  Good

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and completes all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyse the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student participates actively in decision making enabling the improvement of the company status. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company's strategy and value, and answer questions related to these topics.

  Excellent

  The student actively participates in the teamwork and demonstrates a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyses the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company's strategy and the company's value. The student is able to answer various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Recommended or required reading

  Material available in Moodle (lectures and business simulation guide)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Learning simulation, lectures, quiz, coaching

  Assessment methods and criteria

  * Performance/ranking in the game
  * Quality of written tasks
  * Final presentation (0-5)
  * Quiz and company audit (pass/fail)
  * Attendance and activity in team work impact the grade

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  24.01.2022 - 11.03.2022

  Registration

  15.11.2021 - 11.01.2022

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  ---

  Exam schedule

  The game has several game rounds. The schedule of the rounds will be presented in the first lecture. The course will end with the final presentation.

  Students use of time and load

  4 credit points (27 hours per credit point)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is participating to the team work but has great trouble to read the market and company information and utilize that data in decision making. The student is struggling to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome. The student has done all the required course tasks but the quality of those tasks is inadequate.

  Good

  The student actively participates to the teamwork and returns all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyze the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student shows progress in decision making so that the company's financial status will improve. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company strategy and value and answer to the questions relating those topics.

  Excellent

  The student is actively participating to the teamwork and is demonstrating a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyzes the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company strategy and the company value. The student is able to answer to various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

•   Business Planning 1 3B00DV79-3006 31.08.2021-06.10.2021  2 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This business planning course provides both basic theory and hands-on guidance to business planning. Primary objective is for students to learn the basics of business planning (1st period) and be able to create such a plan (2nd period) for a virtual company.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the structure of a typical business plan
  • Describe the purpose of each element of the business plan
  • Apply basic business planning principles for the virtual company

  Course contents

  • What is the importance of a business plan?
  • What are the business idea, mission and vision of a business?
  • How to define value proposition for different customer segments?
  • How to position your own business in the market and gain competitive advantage?
  • How to frame an opportunity and draft a business model?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. He/she is able to draft a viable business idea and give and receive feedback related to business planning. The student can collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks and take responsibility of own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. The student is able to draft a business idea by applying the entrepreneurial approach, and give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning. He/she takes responsibility of his/her own studies and group work related to business planning

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse systematically what is needed for business planning of a start-up company and use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning. He/she is able to justify the credibility of the business idea. The student commits himself/herself to own studies and group work related to business planning.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Recommended or required reading

  Will be given on first lesson

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lessons and hybrid teaching (Teams) for the remote participants. Individual assignments. Group assignments.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  31.08.2021 - 06.10.2021

  Registration

  11.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 45

  Teacher(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not possible

  Training and labour cooperation

  -

  Exam schedule

  Exam 5.10.2021 at 14-17. Re-take(s) as agreed separately.

  International connections

  -

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. He/she is able to draft a viable business idea and give and receive feedback related to business planning. The student can collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks and take responsibility of own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. The student is able to draft a business idea by applying the entrepreneurial approach, and give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning. He/she takes responsibility of his/her own studies and group work related to business planning

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse systematically what is needed for business planning of a start-up company and use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning. He/she is able to justify the credibility of the business idea. The student commits himself/herself to own studies and group work related to business planning.

•   Business Planning 1 3B00DV79-3007 01.09.2021-06.10.2021  2 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This business planning course provides both basic theory and hands-on guidance to business planning. Primary objective is for students to learn the basics of business planning (1st period) and be able to create such a plan (2nd period) for a virtual company.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the structure of a typical business plan
  • Describe the purpose of each element of the business plan
  • Apply basic business planning principles for the virtual company

  Course contents

  • What is the importance of a business plan?
  • What are the business idea, mission and vision of a business?
  • How to define value proposition for different customer segments?
  • How to position your own business in the market and gain competitive advantage?
  • How to frame an opportunity and draft a business model?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. He/she is able to draft a viable business idea and give and receive feedback related to business planning. The student can collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks and take responsibility of own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. The student is able to draft a business idea by applying the entrepreneurial approach, and give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning. He/she takes responsibility of his/her own studies and group work related to business planning

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse systematically what is needed for business planning of a start-up company and use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning. He/she is able to justify the credibility of the business idea. The student commits himself/herself to own studies and group work related to business planning.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Recommended or required reading

  Will be given on first lesson

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lessons and hybrid teaching (Teams) for the remote participants. Individual assignments. Group assignments.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.09.2021 - 06.10.2021

  Registration

  11.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 45

  Teacher(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not possible

  Training and labour cooperation

  no

  Exam schedule

  Exam 5.10.2021 at 14-17. Re-take(s) agreed separately.

  International connections

  no

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. He/she is able to draft a viable business idea and give and receive feedback related to business planning. The student can collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks and take responsibility of own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements needed for starting a company, the stages of a start-up process and the core concepts of business planning. The student is able to draft a business idea by applying the entrepreneurial approach, and give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning. He/she takes responsibility of his/her own studies and group work related to business planning

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse systematically what is needed for business planning of a start-up company and use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning. He/she is able to justify the credibility of the business idea. The student commits himself/herself to own studies and group work related to business planning.

•   Business Planning 2 3B00DV95-3006 27.10.2021-09.12.2021  2 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This business planning course provides both basic theory and hands-on guidance to business planning. Primary objective is for students to learn the basics of business planning (1st period) and be able to create such a plan (2nd period) for a virtual company.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the structure of a typical business plan
  • Describe the purpose of each element of the business plan
  • Apply basic business planning principles

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Business Planning 1

  Course contents

  • What are the features of a good business plan?
  • How to create business plan for the virtual company?
  • How to determine prices for the products and services?
  • Which actions should be taken when implementing a business plan?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements of a business plan and a business model. The student is able to create a viable business plan including the business model. He/she is able to give and receive feedback related to business planning and collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements of a business plan and the core elements of a business model. He/she can create a coherent and credible business plan including the business model. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning and take responsibility of his/her studies and group work related to business planning.

  Excellent

  The student can use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning and business models. The student is able to justify the decisions in the business plan with proper analysis and commit himself/herself to individual studies and group work related to business planning.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Recommended or required reading

  Will be given on first lesson.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lessons and hybrid teaching (Teams) for the remote participants. Individual assignments. Group assignments.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  27.10.2021 - 09.12.2021

  Registration

  11.06.2021 - 27.10.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 45

  Teacher(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not possible

  Training and labour cooperation

  No

  Exam schedule

  No exam

  International connections

  No

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements of a business plan and a business model. The student is able to create a viable business plan including the business model. He/she is able to give and receive feedback related to business planning and collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements of a business plan and the core elements of a business model. He/she can create a coherent and credible business plan including the business model. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning and take responsibility of his/her studies and group work related to business planning.

  Excellent

  The student can use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning and business models. The student is able to justify the decisions in the business plan with proper analysis and commit himself/herself to individual studies and group work related to business planning.

•   Business Planning 2 3B00DV95-3007 26.10.2021-09.12.2021  2 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This business planning course provides both basic theory and hands-on guidance to business planning. Primary objective is for students to learn the basics of business planning (1st period) and be able to create such a plan (2nd period) for a virtual company.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the structure of a typical business plan
  • Describe the purpose of each element of the business plan
  • Apply basic business planning principles

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Business Planning 1

  Course contents

  • What are the features of a good business plan?
  • How to create business plan for the virtual company?
  • How to determine prices for the products and services?
  • Which actions should be taken when implementing a business plan?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements of a business plan and a business model. The student is able to create a viable business plan including the business model. He/she is able to give and receive feedback related to business planning and collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements of a business plan and the core elements of a business model. He/she can create a coherent and credible business plan including the business model. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning and take responsibility of his/her studies and group work related to business planning.

  Excellent

  The student can use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning and business models. The student is able to justify the decisions in the business plan with proper analysis and commit himself/herself to individual studies and group work related to business planning.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Recommended or required reading

  Will be given on first lesson.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lessons and hybrid teaching (Teams) for the remote participants. Individual assignments. Group assignments.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  26.10.2021 - 09.12.2021

  Registration

  11.06.2021 - 26.10.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 45

  Teacher(s)

  Tuomo Soini

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not possible

  Training and labour cooperation

  No

  Exam schedule

  No exam

  International connections

  No

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the core elements of a business plan and a business model. The student is able to create a viable business plan including the business model. He/she is able to give and receive feedback related to business planning and collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studies related to business planning.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the core elements of a business plan and the core elements of a business model. He/she can create a coherent and credible business plan including the business model. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning and take responsibility of his/her studies and group work related to business planning.

  Excellent

  The student can use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning and business models. The student is able to justify the decisions in the business plan with proper analysis and commit himself/herself to individual studies and group work related to business planning.

•   Conflict Management and Communication 3B00DW95-3004 07.03.2022-31.07.2022  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course aims at improving the students’ understanding of conflict management, resolution and communication, in a company or organization environment. Furthermore, crisis communication is among the essential topics of the course.
  
  There is an increasing need for settling disputes between individuals and groups of individuals, as a result of internationalization of business and a variety of financial restraints that cause tension among management and personnel of a company (internal conflict management). External conflict management deals with measures a company must take in order to control its brand, image, customer and stakeholder relations, in circumstances of uncertainties and even open conflicts.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  The course will include demonstrations, examples, creation of conflict and crisis resolution strategy/plans, communication rehearsals and analyses. It is suitable for students who are interested in developing one’s conflict and crisis management abilities, especially in terms of communication.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name basic concepts of conflict management, change and crisis communication and the ways of influencing (lobbying). He/she is able to recognise situations where these communication skills are needed. He/she knows the significance of these in terms of advocating welfare of the organisation he/she represents. He/she is able to apply the tools and best practices in simple cases.

  Good

  The student can explain why conflict management, change and crisis communication, and influencing are important for any organisation. He/she has, to some extent, the ability to apply theories on them in conjunction with real life cases. He/she is able to participate in producing credible and implementable plans for situations where these are needed. The student is able to act in a sustainable way ethically in delicate conflict and crisis situations.

  Excellent

  The student is able to take initiative in complex conflict and crisis situations, as well as in lobbying for his/her organisation. He/she is able to co-lead a group responsibly for prompt action that is often required, in terms of preventing the organisation from finding itself in a further predicament. He/she can be entrusted with the role of a spokesperson and mediator even in demanding conflict and crisis cases. He/she understands the significance of trustworthy appearance while addressing demanding cases on behalf of his/her organisation.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Kai Hintsanen

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 31.07.2022

  Registration

  20.11.2021 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Kai Hintsanen

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Consultation Projects, Entrepreneurship Focus 3B00EX35-3002 15.09.2021-15.12.2021  10 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Learning outcomes of the course unit
  This course will cover how innovation supports entrepreneurs through the creation of new businesses opportunities, capturing of new markets and improved organizational effectiveness. The course will focus on the role of innovation in the entrepreneurial process and how innovation can be transformed into ongoing new ventures. Innovation and entrepreneurship theories and concepts will be applied in real life business cases. The course approach is practical: teams of 3-4 students pick up a project from a commissioning company/organization or start project of their own.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  • Understand the role of innovation in the context of entrepreneurship
  • Carry out consultation projects with a focus on entrepreneurship
  • Accomplish the project, analyze and report the results to customer
  • Plan and implement a project independently and as member of a team.

  Course contents

  • How to utilize innovation in the context of entrepreneurship
  • How to convert ideas to innovation?
  • How to commercialize innovations?
  • How to implement innovation management in start-up companies
  • How to consult entrepreneurs on innovation

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to apply the concepts and theories of innovation into practice by carrying out simple consultation projects for startups or SME:s. Under supervision and with the support of a mentor, the student is able to accomplish the project and report the results to the customer. He/she can support a consultation project as member of a team.

  Good

  The student is familiar with the concepts and theories of innovation and can utilize them in a practical small business case consultation project. He/she can independently and as a member of a group carry out consultation project for startups or SMEs. The student is able to plan, implement, and evaluate consultation projects and report the project results to the customer. He/she can contribute to the outcomes of a consultation project as a member of a team.

  Excellent

  The student has in-depth understanding of the concepts and theories of innovation and he/she can utilise these concepts in a practical small business case consultation project. He/she can independently, or in a leading role in a team, carry out consultation projects for startups and SMEs. The student is able to plan, implement, and report the project to the customer. The student is able to reflect on his/hers own as well as team work process. He/she can facilitate, contribute and enhance the outcomes of a consultation project as a leading member of a team.

  Further information

  This course will be taught in conjunction with the course “INNOVATIONS AND BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (5 credits)”

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Tuula Andersson

  Recommended or required reading

  Literature from Innovations and Business Management -course

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course is based on learning by doing and collaborative learningn. The students solve a real business problem using the tools and methods learned in the course Innovations and Business Management. Active participation in the weekly teamwork sessions is mandatory.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  15.09.2021 - 15.12.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 15.09.2021

  Credits

  10 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Tuula Andersson, Sven Rassl, International Business, IB Virtuaalihenkilö

  Further information for students

  Teacher: Tuula Andersson (tuula.andersson@tuni.fi)

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  10 cr

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  none

  Training and labour cooperation

  Student teams will work with a real business case solving a development problem. The teams are expected to take ownership of their project and be responsible of the communication with the case companies.

  Exam schedule

  No exam. Upgrading of the final grade must be discussed individually with the instructors. The grade will be based of teamwork and individual upgrading is difficult. Students are requested to take this into account in their work for the course.

  Students use of time and load

  10 credits x 27 hours = 270 hours of student work altogether.
  Most of the work is done outside lectures in small teams. It is to be noted that the course requires approximately 20 hours of student work every week during the 3 months that the course is running.

  Content periodicity

  Teacher coaching sessions every week as per a schedule announced during the first class. Teams are expected to be present and able to work during the coaching sessions. Otherwise teams must plan their working scedule independently.

•   Corporate Finance 3B00DW49-3002 17.01.2022-13.04.2022  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course covers the basic aspects of corporate finance, the structure and functions of financial markets and elements of decision making on financial questions.
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  
  - Compare the investment opportunities of a company and define their profitability by using alternative investment decision criteria
  - Compare the alternative sources of corporate financing
  - Calculate the cost of capital
  - Define how risk relates to return
  - Describe the structure and functions of financial markets

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  - How do companies compare different investment opportunities?
  - What are the alternative sources of corporate financing?
  - How are risk and return related?
  - How is the cost of capital defined?
  - What is the structure and what are the functions of financial markets?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to explain the fundamentals of corporate finance. The student recognises and is able to determine and to a certain extent use the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance. He/she can use different methods to evaluate investment opportunities and understands how risk and return are related.

  Excellent

  The student masters the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance in an excellent manner. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learned understanding of the framework of financial markets.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Recommended or required reading

  - Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, Global Edition, Second Edition. J.Berk, P.DeMarzo and J. Harford. Pearson International Edition.2019 or older edition
  - MyFinanceLab - online material
  - Moodle - online material

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - lectures
  - assignments (MyFinanceLab)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  - Exam (80%)
  - Homework, MyFinanceLab (20%)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  17.01.2022 - 13.04.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 09.01.2022

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  ---

  Training and labour cooperation

  ---

  Exam schedule

  in April 2022, date still open

  International connections

  ---

  Students use of time and load

  4 ECTS, approximately 108 hours.

  Content periodicity

  Lessons usually once a week

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has not achieved the objectives of the course.

  Satisfactory

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands fundamentals of corporate finance. Student recognizes, is able to determine and to a certain extent use the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance.

  Good

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance well.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning.

•   Customer Intelligence, Research and Project Management 3B00DW25-3003 09.09.2021-07.12.2021  8 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The aims of this course are threefold. It provides the students understanding in customer intelligence: how to collect and analyze customer information in a reliable and useful way. It also gives the students basic knowledge of the necessary research approaches for their final thesis and possible further studies. In addition the course includes a project management module to develop skills in managing a multicultural business project.
  
  After completing the course the student will be able to plan and execute a customer oriented research and development project in a scientifically reliable way.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Key questions:
  - What are the principles of valid and reliable research for business or
  academic world?
  - Which tools and methods can be used in increasing the understanding of
  customer needs to co-create customer value?
  - How to refine research data to customer intelligence?
  - How to communicate the results in an interesting way?
  - How to manage a research and development project successfully?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has rudimentary knowledge of quantitative and qualitative research methods, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. He/she is capable of collecting and analysing basic customer data. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

  Good

  The student has advanced knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select suitable data collection methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence

  Excellent

  The student has excellent knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews, observations, document analysis and others. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select accurate data collection methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence. The student thoroughly understands how data, analytics, and insights work together.

  Further information

  The course consists of lectures, exercises and the planning and execution of a customer related r&d project for a company or organization.
  
  Contents of the lectures:
  - Introduction: What is customer intelligence, What is academic research
  - Collecting and analyzing data in a reliable way
  - Introduction of qualitative methods
  - Introduction of quantitative methods
  - R&D process
  - Project Management principles
  
  Research and Development Project:
  Student teams find themselves a customer organization with an information and development need, execute data collection and analysis and give development suggestions based on their analysis. The outcomes will be presented in a public seminar, which is planned and managed by the students themselves.
  
  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Lecture slides and other material given in the lectures.
  Brown, T.J. and Suter, T. 2012. MR, USA: South-Western

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  contact teaching
  exercises
  practical work / research project

  Assessment methods and criteria

  - Theory, qualitative and quantitative methods 25%
  - Project Management (exercises, project planning and reporting, final seminar arrangements) 30%
  - CI project, 45% including the written plan, execution and final report and participating & presenting in the final seminar (teamwork). Peer evaluation may affect the grade of this part.
  All parts must be passed in order to get the final grade.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  09.09.2021 - 07.12.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  8 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala, Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Tuomo Soini

  Further information for students

  Tuomo Soini
  tel. 040 731 7995
  tuomo.soini@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  4 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  none

  Training and labour cooperation

  Student teams will find themselves a business company or other organisation to be their customer in the practical Customer Intelligence / Research project and work in close cooperation with it throughout the whole course.

  Exam schedule

  Will be announced later.

  Students use of time and load

  The total of the course is 8 credits meaning about 215 hours of student work altogether. Contact teaching and consultation will be about 90 hours. Students' individual work is about 125 hours. Hence, it should be noticed that a great part of the course work is done outside the class hours both independently and in team meetings and the students are required to commit to the teamwork.
  The detailed course plan will be introduced on the first class.
  As deliverables students will produce the following:
  - contract with the customer
  - team agreement
  - project- and research plan
  - final research report
  - project end report
  - presentation (10 min) with visual material in the closing seminar (that customers will participate, too)

  Content periodicity

  Period 1
  Introduction to customer intelligence and research (S Matala)
  Quantitative methods in customer intelligence (A Somlósi-Kovács)
  Qualitative methods in customer intelligence (S Matala)
  Project management (T Soini)
  Period 2
  R&D Project, coaching (T Soini, A Somlósi-Kovács)
  Project management (T Soini)
  Final seminar arrangements
  Final seminar (MANDATORY PARTICIPATION)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands the premises and principles of research, customer intelligence and project management. Student recognizes, is able to determine and use the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management.
  The grade of the team project remains on the level 1 - 2.

  Good

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management well and is able to conduct reasoned analysis. The grade of the team project is 3 - 4.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The grade of the team project is 4 - 5 and the individual exercises as well as participation in the class are on an excellent level.

•   Customer Intelligence, Research and Project Management 3B00DW25-3006 08.09.2021-07.12.2021  8 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The aims of this course are threefold. It provides the students understanding in customer intelligence: how to collect and analyze customer information in a reliable and useful way. It also gives the students basic knowledge of the necessary research approaches for their final thesis and possible further studies. In addition the course includes a project management module to develop skills in managing a multicultural business project.
  
  After completing the course the student will be able to plan and execute a customer oriented research and development project in a scientifically reliable way.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Key questions:
  - What are the principles of valid and reliable research for business or
  academic world?
  - Which tools and methods can be used in increasing the understanding of
  customer needs to co-create customer value?
  - How to refine research data to customer intelligence?
  - How to communicate the results in an interesting way?
  - How to manage a research and development project successfully?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has rudimentary knowledge of quantitative and qualitative research methods, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. He/she is capable of collecting and analysing basic customer data. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

  Good

  The student has advanced knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select suitable data collection methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence

  Excellent

  The student has excellent knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews, observations, document analysis and others. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select accurate data collection methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence. The student thoroughly understands how data, analytics, and insights work together.

  Further information

  The course consists of lectures, exercises and the planning and execution of a customer related r&d project for a company or organization.
  
  Contents of the lectures:
  - Introduction: What is customer intelligence, What is academic research
  - Collecting and analyzing data in a reliable way
  - Introduction of qualitative methods
  - Introduction of quantitative methods
  - R&D process
  - Project Management principles
  
  Research and Development Project:
  Student teams find themselves a customer organization with an information and development need, execute data collection and analysis and give development suggestions based on their analysis. The outcomes will be presented in a public seminar, which is planned and managed by the students themselves.
  
  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Lecture slides and other material given in the lectures.
  Brown, T.J. and Suter, T. 2012. MR, USA: South-Western

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  contact teaching
  exercises
  practical work / research project

  Assessment methods and criteria

  - Theory, qualitative and quantitative methods 25%
  - Project Management (exercises, project planning and reporting, final seminar arrangements) 30%
  - CI project, 45% including the written plan, execution and final report and participating & presenting in the final seminar (teamwork). Peer evaluation may affect the grade of this part.
  All parts must be passed in order to get the final grade.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.09.2021 - 07.12.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  8 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala, Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Tuomo Soini

  Further information for students

  Tuomo Soini
  tel. 040 731 7995
  tuomo.soini@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  4 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  none

  Training and labour cooperation

  Student teams will find themselves a business company or other organisation to be their customer in the practical Customer Intelligence / Research project and work in close cooperation with it throughout the whole course.

  Exam schedule

  Will be announced later.

  Students use of time and load

  The total of the course is 8 credits meaning about 215 hours of student work altogether. Contact teaching and consultation will be about 90 hours. Students' individual work is about 125 hours. Hence, it should be noticed that a great part of the course work is done outside the class hours both independently and in team meetings and the students are required to commit to the teamwork.
  The detailed course plan will be introduced on the first class.
  As deliverables students will produce the following:
  - contract with the customer
  - team agreement
  - project- and research plan
  - final research report
  - project end report
  - presentation (10 min) with visual material in the closing seminar (that customers will participate, too)

  Content periodicity

  Period 1
  Introduction to customer intelligence and research (S Matala)
  Quantitative methods in customer intelligence (A Somlósi-Kovács)
  Qualitative methods in customer intelligence (S Matala)
  Project management (T Soini)
  Period 2
  R&D Project, coaching (T Soini, A Somlósi-Kovács)
  Project management (T Soini)
  Final seminar arrangements
  Final seminar (MANDATORY PARTICIPATION)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands the premises and principles of research, customer intelligence and project management. Student recognizes, is able to determine and use the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management.
  The grade of the team project remains on the level 1 - 2.

  Good

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management well and is able to conduct reasoned analysis. The grade of the team project is 3 - 4.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The grade of the team project is 4 - 5 and the individual exercises as well as participation in the class are on an excellent level.

•   Customer Intelligence, Research and Project Management 3B00DW25-3010 17.01.2022-30.05.2022  8 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The aims of this course are threefold. It provides the students understanding in customer intelligence: how to collect and analyze customer information in a reliable and useful way. It also gives the students basic knowledge of the necessary research approaches for their final thesis and possible further studies. In addition the course includes a project management module to develop skills in managing a multicultural business project.
  
  After completing the course the student will be able to plan and execute a customer oriented research and development project in a scientifically reliable way.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Key questions:
  - What are the principles of valid and reliable research for business or
  academic world?
  - Which tools and methods can be used in increasing the understanding of
  customer needs to co-create customer value?
  - How to refine research data to customer intelligence?
  - How to communicate the results in an interesting way?
  - How to manage a research and development project successfully?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has rudimentary knowledge of quantitative and qualitative research methods, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. He/she is capable of collecting and analysing basic customer data. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

  Good

  The student has advanced knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select suitable data collection methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence

  Excellent

  The student has excellent knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews, observations, document analysis and others. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select accurate data collection methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence. The student thoroughly understands how data, analytics, and insights work together.

  Further information

  The course consists of lectures, exercises and the planning and execution of a customer related r&d project for a company or organization.
  
  Contents of the lectures:
  - Introduction: What is customer intelligence, What is academic research
  - Collecting and analyzing data in a reliable way
  - Introduction of qualitative methods
  - Introduction of quantitative methods
  - R&D process
  - Project Management principles
  
  Research and Development Project:
  Student teams find themselves a customer organization with an information and development need, execute data collection and analysis and give development suggestions based on their analysis. The outcomes will be presented in a public seminar, which is planned and managed by the students themselves.
  
  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sari Matala

  Recommended or required reading

  Lecture slides and other material given in the lectures.
  Brown, T.J. and Suter, T. 2012. MR, USA: South-Western

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  contact teaching
  exercises
  practical work / research project

  Assessment methods and criteria

  - Basics of Research, qualitative and quantitative methods 25%
  - Project Management (exercises, project planning and reporting, final seminar arrangements) 30%
  - CI project, 45% including the written plan, execution and final report and participating & presenting in the final seminar (teamwork). Peer evaluation may affect the grade of this part.
  All parts must be passed in order to get the final grade.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  17.01.2022 - 30.05.2022

  Registration

  15.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  8 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala, Adrián Somlósi-Kovács, Tuomo Soini

  Further information for students

  Tuomo Soini
  tel. 040 731 7995
  tuomo.soini@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  4 cr

  Virtual proportion

  1 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None. Course is a team project that requires intensive participating.

  Training and labour cooperation

  Student teams will find themselves a business company or other organisation to be their customer in the practical Customer Intelligence / Research project and work in close cooperation with it throughout the whole course.

  Exam schedule

  Will be announced later.

  Students use of time and load

  The total of the course is 8 credits meaning about 215 hours of student work altogether. Contact teaching and consultation will be about 90 hours. Students' individual work is about 125 hours. Hence, it should be noticed that a great part of the course work is done outside the class hours both independently and in team meetings and the students are required to commit to the teamwork.
  The detailed course plan will be introduced on the first class.
  As deliverables students will produce the following:
  - contract with the customer
  - team agreement
  - project- and research plan
  - final research report
  - project end report
  - presentation (10 min) with visual material in the closing seminar (that customers will participate, too)

  Content periodicity

  Period 3
  Introduction to customer intelligence and research (S Matala)
  Quantitative methods in customer intelligence (A Somlósi-Kovács)
  Qualitative methods in customer intelligence (S Matala)
  Project management (T Soini)
  Period 4
  R&D Project, coaching (T Soini, A Somlósi-Kovács)
  Project management (T Soini)
  Final seminar arrangements
  Final seminar (MANDATORY PARTICIPATION)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  No participation in team project working or very poor.

  Satisfactory

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands the premises and principles of research, customer intelligence and project management. Student recognizes, is able to determine and use the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management.
  The grade of the team project remains on the level 1 - 2.

  Good

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management well and is able to conduct reasoned analysis. The grade of the team project is 3 - 4.

  Excellent

  Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the concepts and models of customer intelligence and project management in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The grade of the team project is 4 - 5 and the individual exercises as well as participation in the class are on an excellent level.

•   Customer Journey and Marketing Analysis 3B00DW61-3003 19.04.2022-04.05.2022  3 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an independent continuation to the course Marketing in the Digital World. Contemporary digital marketing analytics tools are introduced in order to give the students basic skills in measuring the effectiveness of marketing actions. The students will also learn how to efficiently use information about customer needs and use experiences to develop customer relationships. It investigates the concepts of customer journey and value creation in the context of developing integrated marketing and enhancing customer experience.
  
  After completing this course the students will be able to
  • describe and use the concept of customer journey in analyzing
  customer experience
  • use some of the digital marketing analytics tools
  • use the information to develop customer relationships and
  marketing effectiveness

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing or equivalent and Marketing in the Digital World or equivalent.

  Course contents

  What is customer journey and how is it exploited in marketing planning?
  What are the contents and meaning of value creation and customer experience in the context of customer relationships?
  What kind of marketing analytics tools are available to measure and analyze marketing effectiveness?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of customer journey and needs. The student can use the basic terms and can define customer experience. Student recognises and defines the importance of customer experience in marketing. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating in the teamwork.

  Good

  The student applies customer journey mapping methods and analytical tools accordingly. The student is able to link structures between marketing and customer experience. He/she cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student masters the concepts and models of customer experience, journey and analytics. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned customer journey analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles
  - Case studies
  - Videos
  - Assigned E-books

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course consists of live lessons on campus, individual assignments, team work, and team presentations. Projects are a continuation from Marketing in the Digital World cases.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being
  See objectives in course description

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  19.04.2022 - 04.05.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 20.04.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  Students that completed 3B00DW59-3003 Marketing in the Digital World may attend this course.
  
  Students that completed 3B00DW59-3004 Marketing in the Digital World may enroll to the 3B00DW61-3004 Customer Journey and Marketing Analysis course

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Cooperation with external businesses

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  Some of the teams may have cases from abroad.

  Students use of time and load

  The course will be intensive. Students should be prepared for even load throughout the course.

  Content periodicity

  Course content will be reviewed in the first lesson. Contact days and internal project will discuss topical digital marketing areas. External customer project will run parallel.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of customer journey and needs. The student can use the basic terms and can define customer experience. Student recognises and defines the importance of customer experience in marketing. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating in the teamwork.

  Good

  The student applies customer journey mapping methods and analytical tools accordingly. The student is able to link structures between marketing and customer experience. He/she cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student masters the concepts and models of customer experience, journey and analytics. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned customer journey analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active

•   Customer Journey and Marketing Analysis 3B00DW61-3004 17.04.2022-04.05.2022  3 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an independent continuation to the course Marketing in the Digital World. Contemporary digital marketing analytics tools are introduced in order to give the students basic skills in measuring the effectiveness of marketing actions. The students will also learn how to efficiently use information about customer needs and use experiences to develop customer relationships. It investigates the concepts of customer journey and value creation in the context of developing integrated marketing and enhancing customer experience.
  
  After completing this course the students will be able to
  • describe and use the concept of customer journey in analyzing
  customer experience
  • use some of the digital marketing analytics tools
  • use the information to develop customer relationships and
  marketing effectiveness

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing or equivalent and Marketing in the Digital World or equivalent.

  Course contents

  What is customer journey and how is it exploited in marketing planning?
  What are the contents and meaning of value creation and customer experience in the context of customer relationships?
  What kind of marketing analytics tools are available to measure and analyze marketing effectiveness?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of customer journey and needs. The student can use the basic terms and can define customer experience. Student recognises and defines the importance of customer experience in marketing. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating in the teamwork.

  Good

  The student applies customer journey mapping methods and analytical tools accordingly. The student is able to link structures between marketing and customer experience. He/she cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student masters the concepts and models of customer experience, journey and analytics. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned customer journey analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles
  - Case studies
  - Videos
  - Assigned E-books

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course consists of live lessons on campus, individual assignments, team work, and team presentations. Projects are a continuation from Marketing in the Digital World cases.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being
  See objectives in course description

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  17.04.2022 - 04.05.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 20.04.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  Students that completed 3B00DW59-3004 Marketing in the Digital World may attend this course.
  
  Students that completed 3B00DW59-3003 Marketing in the Digital World may enroll to the 3B00DW61-3003 Customer Journey and Marketing Analysis course.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Cooperation with external businesses

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  Some of the teams may have cases from abroad.

  Students use of time and load

  The course will be intensive. Students should be prepared for even load throughout the course.

  Content periodicity

  Course content will be reviewed in the first lesson. Contact days and internal project will discuss topical digital marketing areas. External customer project will run parallel.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of customer journey and needs. The student can use the basic terms and can define customer experience. Student recognises and defines the importance of customer experience in marketing. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating in the teamwork.

  Good

  The student applies customer journey mapping methods and analytical tools accordingly. The student is able to link structures between marketing and customer experience. He/she cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student masters the concepts and models of customer experience, journey and analytics. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned customer journey analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active

•   E-commerce Strategy and Planning 3B00FB63-3003 25.10.2021-17.12.2021  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The students will learn about strategic planning in e-commerce business model. During this course the students will learn about different kinds of strategic actions and tools that can be used in e-commerce. The student will study different strategy options and make a strategic growth plan for an e-commerce business.
  
  After completing the course student will be able to
  - make a strategic growth plan for e-commerce
  - understand e-commerce risks and management
  - define scalability possibilities and obstacles

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Prerequisite: Business Planning 1 and 2, E-commerce and Platform Economy, or equivalent (Knowledge about digital platforms)

  Course contents

  • How to create an e-commerce strategy?
  • What does a company need for a growth strategy?
  • Why strategic thinking is important?
  • Core concepts of strategic management in e-commerce
  • Prerequisite: Business planning 1 & 2, E-commerce and platform economy, or equivalent

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify principles of the business strategy and strategic planning. He/she recognizes and is able to determine elements of growth strategy. The student is able to participate in a team project performing the given tasks in according to instructions.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the concept and tools of the business strategy and strategic planning. He/she is able to conduct some analysis and suggest development actions suitable for the business strategy. The student actively contributes to a team project being able to receive and give constructive feedback.

  Excellent

  The student masters the concepts and different models of strategic planning and is able to connect business strategy to e-commerce strategy. He/she is able to conduct well-structured analysis and is able to create, evaluate and combine different solutions to a given e-commerce problem. The student acts in a flexible and constructive way in team projects developing the team’s interaction.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Mari Helenius

  Recommended or required reading

  Leading Digital Strategy : Driving Business Growth Through Effective E-commerce By Bones, Chris and Hammersley, James
  
  Plunkett's E-Commerce & Internet Business Almanac 2018 : E-Commerce & Internet Business
  Industry Market Research, Statistics, Trends & Leading Companies
  by Jack W. Plunkett (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online sessions and self-study. Moodle course part of the course. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Pair task. Evaluation based on the criteria. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  25.10.2021 - 17.12.2021

  Registration

  02.09.2021 - 18.10.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Mari Helenius, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Not returning the given tasks on time. (not translated)

  Satisfactory

  Grade 1-2
  The student is able to identify principles of the business strategy and strategic planning. He/she recognizes and is able to determine elements of growth strategy. The student is able to participate in a team project performing the given tasks in according to instructions. (not translated)

  Good

  Grade 3-4
  The student is able to determine and apply the concept and tools of the business strategy and strategic planning. He/she is able to conduct some analysis and suggest development actions suitable for the business strategy. The student actively contributes to a team project being able to receive and give constructive feedback (not translated)

  Excellent

  Grade 5
  The student masters the concepts and different models of strategic planning and is able to connect business strategy to e-commerce strategy. He/she is able to conduct well-structured analysis and is able to create, evaluate and combine different solutions to a given e-commerce problem. The student acts in a flexible and constructive way in team projects developing the team’s interaction. (not translated)

•   E-commerce and Platform Economy 3B00FB61-3005 03.09.2021-08.10.2021  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. The students are introduced to the theories of platform economy through variety of case studies and business examples. E-commerce ecosystems are studied and network theories applied to e-commerce ecosystems.
  After completing the course student will be able to
  - describe the theories of platform economy
  - understand the different revenue logics in e-commerce
  - define different networks, actors and interactions in ecosystem
  - build a platform economy based business model

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Prerequisite: Business Planning 1 and 2 or equivalent

  Course contents

  • Network effects
  • Digital platforms
  • Knowing, understanding and applying digital technologies
  • Building e-commerce
  • Business Model Canvas
  • Prerequisite: Business planning 1 and 2 or equivalent

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. He/she can use the basic terms and can define e-commerce. The student recognises and defines different theories in ecosystems and e-commerce business models. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. He/she has been partly active in participating the teamwork according to the peer evaluation.

  Good

  The student has achieved the course objectives well, but needs further development. He/she can apply theories accordingly. The student is able to structure between business models and earning logic. The student cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

  Excellent

  The student has achieved the course objectives excellently. He/she masters the concepts and models of platform economy, business models and revenue models. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned e-commerce business model and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online implementation. Selfstudy online. Tasks: mini exams, learning diary and an essay. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  03.09.2021 - 08.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 45

  Teacher(s)

  Jouni Viidanoja, Mari Helenius, Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  4 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Students use of time and load

  5 credits = 135 hours (not translated)

  Content periodicity

  5 modules. Each week opens a new module (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. He/she can use the basic terms and can define e-commerce. The student recognises and defines different theories in ecosystems and e-commerce business models. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. He/she has been partly active in participating the teamwork according to the peer evaluation. (not translated)

  Good

  The student has achieved the course objectives well, but needs further development. He/she can apply theories accordingly. The student is able to structure between business models and earning logic. The student cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. (not translated)

  Excellent

  The student has achieved the course objectives excellently. He/she masters the concepts and models of platform economy, business models and revenue models. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned e-commerce business model and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active. (not translated)

•   Emergency Supply Chain Management 3B00DW67-3002 07.03.2022-31.07.2022  2 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course provides students with a brief introduction on logistics and supply chain management. It identifies the major supply chain issues in the humanitarian sector, particularly as they relate to the emergencies and also reveals the need for cross-learning between the business and the humanitarian sector.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  
  Understand the characteristics of a humanitarian supply chain management speed.
  Understand Humanitarian and emergency cycle
  Analys the Logistics cases from the ground: Red-Cross, DHL, NESA
  Understand the coordination and complexity in humanitarian SCM.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Logistics of humanitarian aid
  Preparedness
  Coordination
  Building a successfull partnership ( Private: TNT-WFP case)
  Reading materials and articles.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in emergency supply chain management.
  
  He/she has the basic understanding of humanitarian logistics in general. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in emergency supply chain. He/she can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of humanitarian logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. He/she contributes to the tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in emergency supply chain.
  
  He/she has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of humanitarian logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants of the group. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sami Kalliokoski

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 31.07.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Teacher(s)

  Sami Kalliokoski

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   Enterprise Resource Planning 3B00DW69-3002 14.03.2022-13.05.2022  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers the primary ideas of Enterprise Resource Planning systems (ERP). The course focuses on SAP-system (integrated modules) from logistics point of view. It explores integration between the Transportation Management Systems (TMS) and Warehouse Management Systems (WMS). More information is available at www.logivo.fi.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  
  Define the business process model and ERP selection criterias.
  Describe what enterprise resource planning (ERP) means.
  Support ERP project implementations.
  Navigate in SAP R/3 and Business One environment.
  Work in details with the SAP AIO module (sales and distribution, Material Management,).
  Act as a SAP user: Master data, material data.
  Plan the first phases in SAP customizing.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -The Basics of logistics is a prerequisite to this course

  Course contents

  Introduction to ERP systems
  Navigation in SAP AIO
  SAP AIO without WMS
  SAP AIO with WMS in partnership with guest lecturer from Belgium
  ERP implementation project as a cmpany based assignment
  SAP customizing.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows what ERPs are, what they are used for and why. He/she recognises all the relevant organisational resources, their nature and requirements. The student is able to define the main ERP (SAP R/3 / Business One) modules and the ERP’s functional structure and how each module acquires information / contributes to other modules. The student recognises the architecture of an ERP (SAP) from user perspective regarding master and material data and is able to conduct routine operations with them. The student has also a basic understanding about organisational requirements and lifecycle stages of an ERP project.

  Good

  The student is able to explain an organisation’s business processes, especially on sales, distribution and material management with great clarity. The student has good understanding of the organisation’s value chain from raw materials to finished products and he/she is capable of applying this data within ERP. He/she has good oversight over stakeholder contacts and is able to manage the organisation’s ERP master data and, with some effort, manage stakeholder contacts and all data regarding materials, the organisation procures, produces, or keeps in stock. The student also knows which stakeholders and offerings are connected with which business processes in a given situation and he/she is capable of managing this business information with the support of ERP in daily business.

  Excellent

  The student can benchmark various ERPs from the organisation’s perspective and recognise beneficiary and disadvantageous elements for the organisation. He/she can recommend the best ERP for the organisation. The student has excellent understanding over the various resource types and he/she is able to use ERP system in automating and managing the variety of back and front office functions and their sub-stages. The student can recognise possible bottlenecks in the ERP environment and is able to customise the ERP user interface and improve its usage efficiency, especially regarding the sales and distribution (SD) module. The student has fair understanding over the functionality of other ERP modules such as financials and controlling (FICO), human resources (HR), materials management (MM) and production planning (PP).

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Lasse Hillman

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped class sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Remote Lab workshops
  - Project-based learning

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The course will consist of two separate parts: ERP general and SAP specic parts. In order to pass the course, both parts have to be accepted.
  1. ERP generic part will be evaluated on scale 0-5 by the teacher of that part
  2. SAP part will be evaluated by teacher of that part as pass / fail

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  14.03.2022 - 13.05.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Teacher(s)

  Lasse Hillman, Matti Karlsson

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Hands-on approach with SAP and chosen tool in the class project

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  N/A

  Students use of time and load

  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and SAP exercises
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Themes will be reviewed in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  If either part of the course is evaluated as FAIL, the the whole course will fail.

  Satisfactory

  The student knows what ERPs are, what they are used for and why. He/she recognises all the relevant organisational resources, their nature and requirements. The student is able to define the main ERP (SAP R/3 / Business One) modules and the ERP’s functional structure and how each module acquires information / contributes to other modules. The student recognises the architecture of an ERP (SAP) from user perspective regarding master and material data and is able to conduct routine operations with them. The student has also a basic understanding about organisational requirements and lifecycle stages of an ERP project.

  Good

  The student is able to explain an organisation’s business processes, especially on sales, distribution and material management with great clarity. The student has good understanding of the organisation’s value chain from raw materials to finished products and he/she is capable of applying this data within ERP. He/she has good oversight over stakeholder contacts and is able to manage the organisation’s ERP master data and, with some effort, manage stakeholder contacts and all data regarding materials, the organisation procures, produces, or keeps in stock. The student also knows which stakeholders and offerings are connected with which business processes in a given situation and he/she is capable of managing this business information with the support of ERP in daily business.

  Excellent

  The student can benchmark various ERPs from the organisation’s perspective and recognise beneficiary and disadvantageous elements for the organisation. He/she can recommend the best ERP for the organisation. The student has excellent understanding over the various resource types and he/she is able to use ERP system in automating and managing the variety of back and front office functions and their sub-stages. The student can recognise possible bottlenecks in the ERP environment and is able to customise the ERP user interface and improve its usage efficiency, especially regarding the sales and distribution (SD) module. The student has fair understanding over the functionality of other ERP modules such as financials and controlling (FICO), human resources (HR), materials management (MM) and production planning (PP).

•   Experience Economy and Product Development 3B00DW33-3002 06.09.2021-30.11.2021  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Experience Economy and Product Development course is introducing the nature of experience economy and it is focused on practical designing and analyzing experience products in tourism business. Students learn the special characteristics of products and services within tourism industry. Product design model for practical product development is studied.
  
  After completing the course students are able to:
  
  Understand the nature of product development in tourism business
  Apply the experience product design tools in product development process
  Analyze the existing products and to improve the quality of experience products

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Which are the characteristics of tourism products and services?
  
  How to apply experience design tools in tourism product development in practice?
  How to analyze the existing experience products and how to improve them?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises the specific nature of product development in experience / tourism business. He/she is able to explain the process of tourism product development using design tools. The student is able to participate in analysing and improving tasks of existing experience products in a team, taking responsibility of his/her own performance.

  Good

  The student can clearly explain various aspects of the nature of product development in experience / tourism business. The student is able to do basic product analysis and apply a product design tool in the context of the experience / tourism business. The student participates actively and responsibly in the teamwork taking responsibility of team performance. The student is capable of receiving and giving feedback actively and constructively.

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse thoroughly an existing experience product and to find and evaluate different tools appropriate for the problem at hand. He/she is able to apply the design tools in product development taking into account the specific business needs and develop highly original or innovative ideas. The student takes a leading role in a team, working in a responsible, flexible and constructive way developing the group's interaction.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  See Moodle page for the most relevant material on experience economy (at this point of your studies). Also additional inspirational material will be given by the teacher during lectures. It is recommended that the student also acquires own suitable material for one's own learning and the task at hand.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course is an advanced course about experience economy, as it continues the 1st year's Introduction to Experience Economy. Now the focus is put into concrete application of the lessons learned - experience economy thinking & doing - in authentic product development work. The students learn about the characteristics of tourism and other experiential products and services, the most applicable and relevant practical experience design tools, and they get to both analyze existing / possible experience products and services - but also learn to improve them in practice.
  The course includes a concrete product development project to be completed in small groups. Also, the course is based on joint teacher driven online sessions, individual reading and material search, and group work for discussions and the main assignment.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  06.09.2021 - 30.11.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Mika Kylänen, Sari Matala

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  4 cr

  Virtual proportion

  4 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  No alternative means of completion.

  Training and labour cooperation

  The teacher tries to agree a concrete development project cooperation, and the students will be informed about this cooperation and the commissioner and the case task at hand on the first online session.

  Students use of time and load

  5 ECTS equals 133 hours of student work, as 1 ECTS credit = 26,7 hours. The work load is divided between joint teacher driven sessions as well as group and individual work approximately online contact session (5 x 3 h = 15 hours), individual reading tasks and material search (~20 hours) and group work assignment (~100 hours). So, the student should find about 2,5 work week's time within a time frame of 2,5 months to complete the main assignment done in small groups.
  Online contact sessions:
  10.9. ZOOM 11-14 Introduction to the course and Experience Economy and Experience Design tools; discussions in small groups
  17.9. ZOOM 11-14 Experience Pyramid model and applying theory into practice
  8.10. ZOOM 11-14 Check point, coaching
  29.10. Check point, coaching
  26.11. Team task Presentations
  
  The student selects a case as a small group to be analyzed/developed applying experience Pyramid model in practice, most likely the case is agreed with a commissioner company or community by the teacher. The task includes a report and a presentation as a group effort.

  Content periodicity

  The course covers experience economy and experience design broadly both in theory and in practice. Key content areas are described in more detail in Moodle. In general, the course discusses the why, the how and the what of experience economy and experience design.

•   Financial Planning 3B00DV91-3006 18.10.2021-01.12.2021  3 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course presents the common financial practices when setting up a company, planning business profitability and working capital needs. The approach is practical with case studies.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Adopt the key elements for stable financial position of a company
  • Estimate and simulate profitability, Cost-Volume-Profit analysis
  • Prepare relevant financial projections for starting a company, budgeting
  • Set the needs for working capital
  • Attach financial plans, as part of business plan

  Course contents

  • What are the factors of profitable business?
  • How to make company profit and loss budget?
  • How to estimate cash flow needs?
  • How to simulate and improve company profitability?
  • What are the local aspects of company financials?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognizes the role and meaning of management accounting in a company. He/she understands the relevant managerial accounting principles and practices used by companies. The student is able to define the importance of the financial planning process and name the important fields within management accounting. The student identifies typical management accounting tools and methods in use; he/she can make basic financial plans and managerial calculations and solve accounting cases by making simple calculations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner. The student can act as part of a team.

  Good

  The student connects the role of management accounting in company operations. He/she structures the course themes with financial accounting by applying the tools and concepts used by companies. He/she explains why and how to use various management accounting methods for targeting profitable business. The student makes simple profitability calculations with simulation analysis and company's financial projections by applying the meaning of margin. The student makes relevant financial comparisons for management decisions and simulates outcome with various accounting factors. The student gives and receives constructive feedback; he/she is able to operate in professional manner by recognising relevant scope and needs. He develops his interaction skills by adding value to the team.

  Excellent

  The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He finds and translates the course themes with working life connections. He expands the context by bringing new perspectives, he analyses the selected management accounting methods. The student adopts the financial mindset, with academic perspective. The student builds creative solutions by combining various course themes. He/she evaluates the outcomes and looks for new opportunities. He/she can justify the decisions made by using the calculations presented. The student aims for alternative perspectives; he/she brings maturity and applies relevant details as needed. The student uses the feedback and iterates his learning process. He/she adds collaboration by being an asset for the team. The student develops creative and constructive working methods by bringing professional commitment throughout the course.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Instructed by the lecturer during the course.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact teaching

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The course evaluation is based on the exam.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.10.2021 - 01.12.2021

  Registration

  18.09.2021 - 17.10.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  No other other options than contact teaching, on-line studies as per degree instructions

  Exam schedule

  The exam and its details to be informed in the beginning of the course.

  International connections

  This is an IB course

  Students use of time and load

  Totally 3 credits (each 27 hours), consisting of lectures, exercises and assignments, and the exam.

  Content periodicity

  There are 5*lectures, the detailed content to be informed in the beginning of the lectures

•   Financial Planning 3B00DV91-3007 18.10.2021-01.12.2021  3 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course presents the common financial practices when setting up a company, planning business profitability and working capital needs. The approach is practical with case studies.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Adopt the key elements for stable financial position of a company
  • Estimate and simulate profitability, Cost-Volume-Profit analysis
  • Prepare relevant financial projections for starting a company, budgeting
  • Set the needs for working capital
  • Attach financial plans, as part of business plan

  Course contents

  • What are the factors of profitable business?
  • How to make company profit and loss budget?
  • How to estimate cash flow needs?
  • How to simulate and improve company profitability?
  • What are the local aspects of company financials?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognizes the role and meaning of management accounting in a company. He/she understands the relevant managerial accounting principles and practices used by companies. The student is able to define the importance of the financial planning process and name the important fields within management accounting. The student identifies typical management accounting tools and methods in use; he/she can make basic financial plans and managerial calculations and solve accounting cases by making simple calculations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner. The student can act as part of a team.

  Good

  The student connects the role of management accounting in company operations. He/she structures the course themes with financial accounting by applying the tools and concepts used by companies. He/she explains why and how to use various management accounting methods for targeting profitable business. The student makes simple profitability calculations with simulation analysis and company's financial projections by applying the meaning of margin. The student makes relevant financial comparisons for management decisions and simulates outcome with various accounting factors. The student gives and receives constructive feedback; he/she is able to operate in professional manner by recognising relevant scope and needs. He develops his interaction skills by adding value to the team.

  Excellent

  The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He finds and translates the course themes with working life connections. He expands the context by bringing new perspectives, he analyses the selected management accounting methods. The student adopts the financial mindset, with academic perspective. The student builds creative solutions by combining various course themes. He/she evaluates the outcomes and looks for new opportunities. He/she can justify the decisions made by using the calculations presented. The student aims for alternative perspectives; he/she brings maturity and applies relevant details as needed. The student uses the feedback and iterates his learning process. He/she adds collaboration by being an asset for the team. The student develops creative and constructive working methods by bringing professional commitment throughout the course.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Instructed by the lecturer during the course

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact teaching

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The course evaluation is based on the exam.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.10.2021 - 01.12.2021

  Registration

  18.09.2021 - 17.10.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  No other other options than contact teaching, on-line studies as per degree instructions

  Exam schedule

  The exam and its details to be informed in the beginning of the course.

  International connections

  This is an IB course

  Students use of time and load

  Totally 3 credits (each 27 hours), consisting of lectures, exercises and assignments, and the exam.

  Content periodicity

  There are 5*lectures, the detailed content to be informed in the beginning of the lectures

•   Financial Statements 3B00DW07-3007 07.03.2022-29.04.2022  2 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will continue bookkeeping in virtual companies. At the end of the course they will prepare the financial statements.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Record basic business transactions in accounting
  • Prepare income statement and balance sheet for a small firm

  Course contents

  • How are business transactions recorded in accounting?
  • How are financial statements prepared?
  • What do annual reports include?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting, income statement and balance sheet. The student knows the basic functions of bookkeeping software. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting. He/she knows how income statement and balance sheet are prepared. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting and financial statements in an excellent manner. The student is able to analyse financial statements and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Recommended or required reading

  - Material in Moodle
  - Accounting and Finance, An Introduction. Eddie McLaney and Peter Atrill. Pearson. 2016 or similar book.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - lectures
  - assignments
  - teamwork
  - bookkeeping of practice firm

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 29.04.2022

  Registration

  16.01.2022 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  --

  Exam schedule

  Course exam in April 2022
  First retake exam on 24th of May,2022
  Second retake exam in September, 2022

  International connections

  -- (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  2 ECTS = 54 hours

•   Financial Statements 3B00DW07-3008 07.03.2022-29.04.2022  2 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will continue bookkeeping in virtual companies. At the end of the course they will prepare the financial statements.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Record basic business transactions in accounting
  • Prepare income statement and balance sheet for a small firm

  Course contents

  • How are business transactions recorded in accounting?
  • How are financial statements prepared?
  • What do annual reports include?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting, income statement and balance sheet. The student knows the basic functions of bookkeeping software. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting. He/she knows how income statement and balance sheet are prepared. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting and financial statements in an excellent manner. The student is able to analyse financial statements and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Recommended or required reading

  - Material in Moodle
  - Accounting and Finance, An Introduction. Eddie McLaney and Peter Atrill. Pearson. 2016 or similar book.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - lectures
  - assignments
  - teamwork
  - bookkeeping of practice firm

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 29.04.2022

  Registration

  16.01.2022 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Pia Lamminsivu

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  --

  Exam schedule

  Course exam in April 2022
  First retake exam on 24th of May,2022
  Second retake exam in September, 2022

  International connections

  -- (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  2 ECTS = 54 hours

•   Finnish as Foreign Language 1 3B00DW21-3003 01.08.2021-16.12.2021  5 cr  (21ENTRE, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course provides the basics of the Finnish language and culture (estimated level A1.2)
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Use the basic structure of Finnish.
  • Manage in Finnish in basic situations like simple shopping and travelling.
  • Learn to build up their vocabulary.
  • Know forms of politeness in Finnish.
  • Know how to write brief messages connected to everyday life.

  Course contents

  • How is Finnish pronounced?
  • Why do I need to pay attention to how words are written?
  • How to make simple statements, ask questions and answer them?
  • How to write short messages in Finnish?
  • What to say in situations like shopping, travelling in Finland?
  • How to be polite, and build up small talk in Finnish?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has completed all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. The student is able to tell a few things about oneself in Finnish comprehensively. The student recognises typical grammatic structures like possessive structure, verb types and partitive.

  Good

  The student has an active attitude towards studying Finnish language and culture showing that by completing written tasks according to the schedule. The student is able to use the typical grammatic structures like possessive structure, verb types and partitive in simple sentences. He/she is able to cope in most common everyday situations like introducing and shopping and tell simple things about his/her day, family, spare time etc. The student is able to write brief messages (e.g. e-mail, text message, and post card) in Finnish and is able to pronounce Finnish clearly enough.

  Excellent

  The student has a positive and active attitude towards learning Finnish and is genuinely interested in Finnish culture, and brings it up by comparing Finnish culture to his/her own. He/she can pronounce Finnish distinctively and is able to use suitable and varied expressions in everyday situations using grammar almost correctly. The student is able to write brief texts in Finnish, which are mostly correct.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Terhi Tapaninen

  Recommended or required reading

  All studying material and material recommendations are to be found in Moodle platform. Study book Suomen mestari 1, chapters 1–4, 8.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Because of the online implementation all kind of online material is utilized. The basic tool in communication during lessons is Zoom. All materials have been collected and structured in Moodle platform. The idea is to make learning basics of Finnish not only important but also interesting and fun.
  o pronunciation exercises
  o vocabulary exercises
  o structural exercises
  o conversational and drama exercises
  o listening comprehension exercises
  o reading comprehension exercises
  o written exercises.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  A course grade will be formed on the basis of a result of the written exam.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2021 - 16.12.2021

  Registration

  02.07.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  21ENTRE

  21IB

  Teacher(s)

  Terhi Tapaninen

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Exam schedule

  A written exam will be conducted in the end of the second period. The date will be informed during the course and marked in Moodle. If possible, it will be in a face to face situation in a classroom in TAMK campus. A retake will be organized same way.

  International connections

  The whole group is international!

  Students use of time and load

  Finnish language differs so much from the mother tonques of the most students. That means rather much work to get in communication in Finnish especially now when a part of the students study abroad without getting help of living in Finland. The work demands time and online collaboration. A regular and active attendance in lessons is important and also compulsory to pass the course. But as said, in addition to it much private learning is needed. 5 ECTs course means 5 x 27 hours of work! To build up one's motivation is very important: to find useful, fun and creative ways to learn, use and understand Finnish. So have Finnish as a hobby also in your free time!

  Content periodicity

  Basic information of Finnish language, pronunciation, greetings, numbers, time expressions, positive and negative verb conjugation, verb types, question sentences, nationalities, simple declensions, everyday vocabulary e.g.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Uncompleted assignments, big difficulties to understand and produce the simplest basic phrases and expressions.

  Satisfactory

  Look at the course information.

  Good

  Look at the course information.

  Excellent

  Look at the course information.

•   Finnish as a Foreign Language 2 3B00DW83-3003 01.08.2021-20.12.2021  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course builds up the knowledge and use of Finnish language in everyday situations, and it also provides wider perspective to Finnish culture. Estimated level A2.1.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Tell about future plans to a Finn in common situations.
  Understand standard business related messages in Finnish.
  Understand standard spoken Finnish.
  Communicate with Finns in typical occasions.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  - Finnish as a Foreign Language 1 (5 cr) or equivalent knowledge.

  Course contents

  How to express plans in good and clear manner in Finnish, spoken and written?
  How to actively broaden vocabulary in daily situations?
  How to understand basic business communication in Finnish?
  What are the most common features of spoken Finnish?
  How to become an observer of Finnish culture and learn about that?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises typical grammatical structures like local cases and object. He/she is able to tell some things about his/her future plans (e.g. travelling) in Finnish in most common situations. He/she is able to tell some simple things of the past and cope to some extent in situations in which Finns use spoken language.

  Good

  The student has an active attitude towards studying the Finnish language and culture showing that by completing written tasks. The student is able to use typical grammatical structures like local cases and object in simple sentences. He/she is able to tell about future plans in simple ways understandable in common situations. The student is able to talk about the past and explain his/her ideas and plans understandably. He/she comprehends main topics in everyday conversations with Finns who talk standard spoken language.

  Excellent

  The student has a positive and active attitude towards learning the language and is genuinely interested in Finnish culture, and brings it up by expressing his/her findings about cultural matters. The student is able to talk understandably about the past and express himself/herself in various ways. He/she can cope in situations with Finns talking standard spoken Finnish, when topics are related to matters he/she is interested in, and/or when topics concern everyday life.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Kirsi Saarinen

  Recommended or required reading

  We will discuss this in the beginning of the course.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Classroom and online meetings.
  Course assignments.
  Exams (a midterm exam and a final exam).
  
  We practise both speaking, listening comprehension, writing, and reading. We will focus on active language use and comprehension.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Participation in the course meetings.
  Review of the course assignments.
  Review of the exams.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2021 - 20.12.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 08.09.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21IB

  Teacher(s)

  Maiju Paldán

  Further information for students

  Not available.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not available.

  Training and labour cooperation

  Not available.

  Exam schedule

  We will talk about this later on the course.

  International connections

  Not available.

  Students use of time and load

  You should prepare for the following schedule in each course week:
  - One three hour course meeting.
  - 3-6 hours of independent work (home work, course assignments, reviews). The amount of independent work varies each week.

  Content periodicity

  We will discuss this in the beginning of the course.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student gets the grade 0 when their course participation fits the following description for all or most parts:
  
  - Has too many absences in the course, and/or does not showcase active and undisturbed participation in the course. Forgets easily about the homework, and is not able to compensate it in other ways (e.g. by classroom participation).
  - Does not submit their assignments in time, and/or does not follow the general guidelines and instructions in their work.
  - Performs poorly in the exams and/or other reviewed assignments, and showcases lack of effort in their work.
  - Relies almost solely on friends, translation apps, and other external resources that can prevent genuine learning. Shows very little effort on learning and doing things indepedently.
  - Showcases very little progression in the course, and does not master any of the major skills that are required in the end of the course.
  
  In case the teacher can not choose the grade based on this criteria, the final exam and other reviewed assignments will determine the grade.

  Satisfactory

  Student gets the grade 1 or 2 when their course participation fits the following description for all or most parts:
  
  - Attends the required amount of course meetings but might not always show active participation. Forgets easily about the homework, and is not able to compensate it in other ways (e.g. by classroom participation).
  - Submits most of their course assignments in time, and has followed the general guidelines in their work, even if the end result needs a lot of improvement.
  - Might not perform well in the exams and other reviewed assignments but can showcase at least some type of progress in their studying.
  - Relies a bit too much on friends, translation apps, and other external resources that can prevent genuine learning. However, puts at least some effort on learning and doing things indepedently.
  - Masters some of the skills that are required in the end of the course but could still benefit from a lot of practice.
  
  In case the teacher can not choose the grade based on this criteria, the final exam and other reviewed assignments will determine the grade.

  Good

  Student gets the grade 3 or 4 when their course participation fits the following description for all or most parts:
  
  - Shows active and undisturbed participation in the course meetings. Does at least most of their homework in time.
  - Submits most of their course assignments in time, and does their work diligently.
  - Performs well or at least moderately well in the exams and other reviewed assignments.
  - Relies only a little on friends, translation apps, and other external resources that can prevent genuine learning. Instead, puts effort on learning and doing things independently.
  - Masters most of the skills that are required in the end of the course but might still need some practise in certain areas.
  
  In case the teacher can not choose the grade based on this criteria, the final exam and other reviewed assignments will determine the grade.

  Excellent

  Student gets the grade 5 when their classroom participation fits the following description for all or most parts:
  
  - Shows active and undisturbed participation in the course meetings. Does at least most of their homework in time.
  - Submits their course assignments in time, and does their work diligently.
  - Performs well in the exams and other reviewed assignments.
  - Relies very little on friends, translation apps, and other external resources that can prevent genuine learning. Instead, puts effort on learning and doing things independently.
  - Masters fluently the skills that are required in the end of the course, and even exceeds the expectations in certain areas.
  
  In case the teacher can not choose the grade based on this criteria, the final exam and other reviewed assignments will determine the grade.

•   Finnish as a Foreign Language 2 3B00DW83-3005 20.01.2022-05.05.2022  5 cr  (21ENTRE, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course builds up the knowledge and use of Finnish language in everyday situations, and it also provides wider perspective to Finnish culture. Estimated level A2.1.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Tell about future plans to a Finn in common situations.
  Understand standard business related messages in Finnish.
  Understand standard spoken Finnish.
  Communicate with Finns in typical occasions.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  - Finnish as a Foreign Language 1 (5 cr) or equivalent knowledge.

  Course contents

  How to express plans in good and clear manner in Finnish, spoken and written?
  How to actively broaden vocabulary in daily situations?
  How to understand basic business communication in Finnish?
  What are the most common features of spoken Finnish?
  How to become an observer of Finnish culture and learn about that?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises typical grammatical structures like local cases and object. He/she is able to tell some things about his/her future plans (e.g. travelling) in Finnish in most common situations. He/she is able to tell some simple things of the past and cope to some extent in situations in which Finns use spoken language.

  Good

  The student has an active attitude towards studying the Finnish language and culture showing that by completing written tasks. The student is able to use typical grammatical structures like local cases and object in simple sentences. He/she is able to tell about future plans in simple ways understandable in common situations. The student is able to talk about the past and explain his/her ideas and plans understandably. He/she comprehends main topics in everyday conversations with Finns who talk standard spoken language.

  Excellent

  The student has a positive and active attitude towards learning the language and is genuinely interested in Finnish culture, and brings it up by expressing his/her findings about cultural matters. The student is able to talk understandably about the past and express himself/herself in various ways. He/she can cope in situations with Finns talking standard spoken Finnish, when topics are related to matters he/she is interested in, and/or when topics concern everyday life.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Terhi Tapaninen

  Recommended or required reading

  Teacher´s materials, course book Suomen mestari 1, chapters 5-9.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Classroom meetings if the Covid-19 situation allows it.
  Course assignments.
  Exams (a midterm exam and a final exam).
  
  We practise speaking, listening comprehension, writing, and reading. We will focus on active language use and comprehension.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Participation in the course meetings.
  Review of the course assignments.
  Review of the exams.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  20.01.2022 - 05.05.2022

  Registration

  01.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  21ENTRE

  20ENTRE

  20IB

  21IB

  Teacher(s)

  Terhi Tapaninen

  Further information for students

  Not available.

  Unit, in charge

  TAMK Languages and Communication

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not available.

  Training and labour cooperation

  Not available.

  Exam schedule

  We will talk about this later on the course.

  International connections

  Not available.

  Students use of time and load

  You should prepare for the following schedule in each course week:
  - One three hour course meeting.
  - 3-6 hours of independent work (home work, course assignments, reviews). The amount of independent work varies each week.

  Content periodicity

  We will discuss this in the beginning of the course.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student gets the grade 0 when their course participation fits the following description for all or most parts:
  
  - Has too many absences in the course, and/or does not showcase active and undisturbed participation in the course. Forgets easily about the homework, and is not able to compensate it in other ways (e.g. by classroom participation).
  - Does not submit their assignments in time, and/or does not follow the general guidelines and instructions in their work.
  - Performs poorly in the exams and/or other reviewed assignments, and showcases lack of effort in their work.
  - Relies almost solely on friends, translation apps, and other external resources that can prevent genuine learning. Shows very little effort on learning and doing things indepedently.
  - Showcases very little progression in the course, and does not master any of the major skills that are required in the end of the course.
  
  In case the teacher can not choose the grade based on this criteria, the final exam and other reviewed assignments will determine the grade.

  Satisfactory

  Student gets the grade 1 or 2 when their course participation fits the following description for all or most parts:
  
  - Attends the required amount of course meetings but might not always show active participation. Forgets easily about the homework, and is not able to compensate it in other ways (e.g. by classroom participation).
  - Submits most of their course assignments in time, and has followed the general guidelines in their work, even if the end result needs a lot of improvement.
  - Might not perform well in the exams and other reviewed assignments but can showcase at least some type of progress in their studying.
  - Relies a bit too much on friends, translation apps, and other external resources that can prevent genuine learning. However, puts at least some effort on learning and doing things indepedently.
  - Masters some of the skills that are required in the end of the course but could still benefit from a lot of practice.
  
  In case the teacher can not choose the grade based on this criteria, the final exam and other reviewed assignments will determine the grade.

  Good

  Student gets the grade 3 or 4 when their course participation fits the following description for all or most parts:
  
  - Shows active and undisturbed participation in the course meetings. Does at least most of their homework in time.
  - Submits most of their course assignments in time, and does their work diligently.
  - Performs well or at least moderately well in the exams and other reviewed assignments.
  - Relies only a little on friends, translation apps, and other external resources that can prevent genuine learning. Instead, puts effort on learning and doing things independently.
  - Masters most of the skills that are required in the end of the course but might still need some practise in certain areas.
  
  In case the teacher can not choose the grade based on this criteria, the final exam and other reviewed assignments will determine the grade.

  Excellent

  Student gets the grade 5 when their classroom participation fits the following description for all or most parts:
  
  - Shows active and undisturbed participation in the course meetings. Does at least most of their homework in time.
  - Submits their course assignments in time, and does their work diligently.
  - Performs well in the exams and other reviewed assignments.
  - Relies very little on friends, translation apps, and other external resources that can prevent genuine learning. Instead, puts effort on learning and doing things independently.
  - Masters fluently the skills that are required in the end of the course, and even exceeds the expectations in certain areas.
  
  In case the teacher can not choose the grade based on this criteria, the final exam and other reviewed assignments will determine the grade.

•   Global Business Trends 3B00DX01-3001 07.03.2022-10.05.2022  5 cr  (19IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course focuses on the increasing importance of the international dimension of business. The students choose one major theme for their independent learning project which concentrates on one major theory or framework to broaden their understanding of international business strategies to prepare students for an internationally oriented career. There are internationalization business topics covered in areas of: Financing, taxation, organization, management, business policies, marketing, human resources, political risk assessment, E-commerce and economic integration.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Have an ability to assess the effects of major economic, management, social and technical trends and factors on businesses operating internationally.
  Have an understanding of shifting competitive advantage and international strategy formation and evolution in major manufacturing and service sectors.
  Have the ability to use relevant sources of information to carry out research in their chosen topic.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What are the critical issues in international business?
  How to conduct an individual/group project on international business issue?
  How to integrate theory with practice through research/development oriented project?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student shows some basic understanding of the future business trends. He/she is aware of the changes that are taking place in international business. He/she is able to give examples of some of the business megatrends. He/she takes responsibility for his/her own work.

  Good

  The student shows understanding of the future trends in international business. He/she is able to give examples of the effects of digitalisation, robotisation, climate change, smart cities, other future trends, and their impact on doing business. He/she is able to apply this knowledge and demonstrate how these trends will affect doing business.

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse economically and operationally how the future megatrends will affect doing international business. He/she can prepare and perform an industry-level briefing on the characteristics of future trends of the chosen field. He/she takes it for granted that the future trends are very different from the past ones, and adjusts his/her thinking accordingly.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Toni Lehtimäki

  Recommended or required reading

  Will be announced later

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online and contact lesson
  Study conversation
  Class activity
  Individual task
  Project
  Presentation

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Individual task: 20%
  Pair task: 30%
  Trio Project: 30%
  Presentation: 10%
  Class activity: 10%

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 10.05.2022

  Registration

  01.01.2022 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  22KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Shaidul Kazi

  Further information for students

  The students should do course activities on time. Doing late may affect to the final grade.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Talk to the teacher

  Training and labour cooperation

  The students will write course project based on a real world company

  Exam schedule

  No test but group project and its oral presentation

  International connections

  Possible and welcome

  Students use of time and load

  - Total resource hurs= 27x5 = 135
  - Contact meeting 7 (7 x 3): 21 hours
  - Project: 40 hours
  - Individual, pair task and class activity: 30 hours
  - Reading: 44 hours

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Not done obligatory course activities

  Satisfactory

  The student shows some basic understanding of the future business trends. He/she is aware of the changes that are taking place in international business. He/she is able to give examples of some of the business megatrends. He/she takes responsibility for his/her own work.

  Good

  The student shows understanding of the future trends in international business. He/she is able to give examples of the effects of digitalisation, robotisation, climate change, smart cities, other future trends, and their impact on doing business. He/she is able to apply this knowledge and demonstrate how these trends will affect doing business.

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse economically and operationally how the future megatrends will affect doing international business. He/she can prepare and perform an industry-level briefing on the characteristics of future trends of the chosen field. He/she takes it for granted that the future trends are very different from the past ones, and adjusts his/her thinking accordingly.

•   Global Economics 3B00DW13-3006 07.03.2022-15.05.2022  3 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  National economies are an integral part of the global economy. Issues and events in global economy have strong influence upon the function of national economy.
  The course aims at familiarizing the students with global institutions, agreements, events, trends and their relationship to the national economy.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  • Understand the benefits of specialization and the impact on trade and investment
  • Know trade barriers and their background factors
  • Understand exchange and interest rate mechanisms
  • Conceptualize the role of global organizations
  • Understand trade liberalization and regional economic integration
  • Relationships among national economy, national debt and the international rating agencies

  Course contents

  • What are the benefits of global trade?
  • What are the main international trade theories?
  • What are the effects of trade barriers on national economies?
  • What are the reasons behind exchange and interest rate volatility?
  • What is the role of economic integration in world trade?
  • How the rating agencies influence national borrowing rate?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can give the fundamentals for the question: What is global economics about? He/she recognises the difference between micro and macro economy and is able to name essential factors in the field of macro economy. He/she manages to identify the factors that affect an economy. The student can give and receive feedback.

  Good

  The student applies the connections between global economic factors like GDP, GNP, inflation, interest rates and other relevant macro-economic factors. He/she knows the relevant terms and connections and can explain basic cause-effect relationships. He/she sees the importance of global trade and adopts various macro theories. The student gives and receives constructive feedback and develops his/her skills for co-operation.

  Excellent

  The student analyses and translates the connections within global economy factors. He/she can generalise complicated theories by seeing the relevancy behind the economic signals. He/she can explain economic fluctuations and reasons behind them. He/she justifies outcome for various global assumptions, formulating the impacts of GDP, inflation, employment and other factors related. He/she finds the links between global economy factors by evaluating the information available. The student uses feedback to grow professionally, he/she develops creative and flexible mindset and works in a responsible manner.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials and links dedicated by the lecturer

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact teaching with team working, on-line studies optional depending on the conditions

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 15.05.2022

  Registration

  16.01.2022 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not available, the course is based on contact teaching

  Training and labour cooperation

  N/A

  Exam schedule

  To be informed during the first lecture

  International connections

  An international implementation

  Students use of time and load

  The course is 3cr (27h each), which is based on lectures, team working and individual studying

  Content periodicity

  There are 5 * 3h lectures, according the schedule set

•   Global Economics 3B00DW13-3008 07.03.2022-15.05.2022  3 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  National economies are an integral part of the global economy. Issues and events in global economy have strong influence upon the function of national economy.
  The course aims at familiarizing the students with global institutions, agreements, events, trends and their relationship to the national economy.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  • Understand the benefits of specialization and the impact on trade and investment
  • Know trade barriers and their background factors
  • Understand exchange and interest rate mechanisms
  • Conceptualize the role of global organizations
  • Understand trade liberalization and regional economic integration
  • Relationships among national economy, national debt and the international rating agencies

  Course contents

  • What are the benefits of global trade?
  • What are the main international trade theories?
  • What are the effects of trade barriers on national economies?
  • What are the reasons behind exchange and interest rate volatility?
  • What is the role of economic integration in world trade?
  • How the rating agencies influence national borrowing rate?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can give the fundamentals for the question: What is global economics about? He/she recognises the difference between micro and macro economy and is able to name essential factors in the field of macro economy. He/she manages to identify the factors that affect an economy. The student can give and receive feedback.

  Good

  The student applies the connections between global economic factors like GDP, GNP, inflation, interest rates and other relevant macro-economic factors. He/she knows the relevant terms and connections and can explain basic cause-effect relationships. He/she sees the importance of global trade and adopts various macro theories. The student gives and receives constructive feedback and develops his/her skills for co-operation.

  Excellent

  The student analyses and translates the connections within global economy factors. He/she can generalise complicated theories by seeing the relevancy behind the economic signals. He/she can explain economic fluctuations and reasons behind them. He/she justifies outcome for various global assumptions, formulating the impacts of GDP, inflation, employment and other factors related. He/she finds the links between global economy factors by evaluating the information available. The student uses feedback to grow professionally, he/she develops creative and flexible mindset and works in a responsible manner.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials and links dedicated by the lecturer

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact teaching with team working, on-line studies optional depending on the conditions

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 15.05.2022

  Registration

  16.01.2022 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not available, the course is based on contact teaching

  Training and labour cooperation

  N/A

  Exam schedule

  To be informed during the first lecture

  International connections

  An international implementation

  Students use of time and load

  The course is 3cr (27h each), which is based on lectures, team working and individual studying

  Content periodicity

  There are 5 * 3h lectures, according the schedule set

•   Human Resource Management 3B00DW39-3003 27.10.2021-15.12.2021  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course deals with theories, models and techniques for recruitment, management, maintenance and development of competence based human resources for contemporary multi-skilled- virtual-, and network based organizations.
  
  
  After completing of the course, students will be able to:
  
  Perform basic functions of HRM; staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance.
  
  Define long term HR needs for a company.
  
  Develop company-wide HR policy.
  
  Maintain contact with labor union concerning different company issues.
  
  Deal with multi-skilled workforce.
  
  Integrate effectively ICT to HRM.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  First year BBA studies or equivalent studies for the exchange students

  Course contents

  How the contemporary workplace is changing and how the change process is affecting the HRM?
  
  Why strategic HR planning is necessary for an organization?
  
  What are the different steps in strategic HR planning?
  
  How to effectively perform basic functions of HRM?
  
  How the digitalization process is affecting HR performance?
  
  What are the basic issues to remember in international HRM?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise basic concepts of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she has a basic understanding of the long-term HR needs for a company and can participate in developing a company-wide HR policy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work. The student can give and receive feedback but considers and assesses things from his/her own viewpoints. The student has the skills to be part of the group dealing with the labour union.

  Good

  The student can explain the good practices of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she can explain diverse alternatives for the various HR activities and in addition, can be part of creating a new HR policy for a firm. He/she can help to select good actions for solving HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills further. The student can help to deal with the labour union.

  Excellent

  The student understands the good practices of and the relationships between employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. The student is able to assist in defining the long-term HR needs for a company. He/she can assess diverse alternatives for the various HR activities, can help to create a new HR policy for a firm and solve HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly, constructively and flexibly with a diverse group of colleagues in solving practical problems. In case of need, the student can deal with the labour union.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Human Resource Management (9th edition or the newer publication), Gary Dessler, Prentice Hall
  
  &
  
  Suggested reading materials (given during the implementation)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online lesson
  Study conversation
  Individual task
  Project
  Presentation

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Individual task, project and presentation

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  27.10.2021 - 15.12.2021

  Registration

  15.09.2021 - 27.10.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Shaidul Kazi

  Further information for students

  The course will be online. However, if requires, small group meetings may be held. In this case, announcement will be made later.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  5 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Contact to the course teacher

  Training and labour cooperation

  The course project wil be done in pairs or in small groups and it will be based on an interview with a human resource manager of a company.

  Exam schedule

  There is no test but project, presentation and individual task.

  International connections

  Open

  Students use of time and load

  - Total resource hurs= 27x5 = 135
  - Contact meeting 7 (7 x 3): 21 hours
  - Project: 30 hours
  - Individual task: 30 hours
  - Reading: 47 hours

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Not done the course project, presentation and at least two of the individual tasks

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise basic concepts of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she has a basic understanding of the long-term HR needs for a company and can participate in developing a company-wide HR policy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work. The student can give and receive feedback but considers and assesses things from his/her own viewpoints. The student has the skills to be part of the group dealing with the labour union.

  Good

  The student can explain the good practices of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she can explain diverse alternatives for the various HR activities and in addition, can be part of creating a new HR policy for a firm. He/she can help to select good actions for solving HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills further. The student can help to deal with the labour union.

  Excellent

  The student understands the good practices of and the relationships between employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. The student is able to assist in defining the long-term HR needs for a company. He/she can assess diverse alternatives for the various HR activities, can help to create a new HR policy for a firm and solve HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly, constructively and flexibly with a diverse group of colleagues in solving practical problems. In case of need, the student can deal with the labour union.

•   Information and Communication Technology Skills 3B00DW15-3005 02.09.2021-31.12.2021  3 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course focuses on learning the basic concepts of information communication technology (ICT) and how to use computers in business perspective. The widely known MS-Office package is in use, with practical approach.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Use computer and its operating system.
  • Create documents, calculations, presentations and communicate by using MS-Office.
  • Further develop their practical ICT skills.

  Course contents

  • How to make business documents, where to save and how to print?
  • How to make business spreadsheet calculations and charts?
  • How to make business presentations?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basic ICT terms, is familiar with the basic MS Office tools (Excel, PowerPoint, and Word), and can use them. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student is able to use a cloud environment for sharing information. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studying but may still need some support or supervision for using the tools and working in a group.

  Good

  The student recognises well the basic ICT terms, is familiar with the basic MS Office tools (Excel, PowerPoint, Word) and can tailor their use based on the outcome required. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student uses cloud environment efficiently for sharing information. The student can do the given tasks independently and is able to support other team members.

  Excellent

  The student can broadly and independently apply the MS Office tools and cloud environment. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student is very self-confident in solving problems in his/her application area, can explain and teach the tools and methods to others and help his/her team mates in their ICT problems.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be provided on TUNI Moodle, YouTube sources etc.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Demonstration, hands-on activities.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Continuous assessment and self-evaluation will be used. Peer-evaluation will encourage students to improve their understanding.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  02.09.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  10 - 25

  Teacher(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Prior completion of a similar course, certificate of completion etc.

  Exam schedule

  There will be no exams. The evaluation will be based on attaining 80% of attendance and completion of the assignments and projects.

  International connections

  No!

  Students use of time and load

  Students design templates for Office Word, Excel and PowerPoint.

  Content periodicity

  - Saving and filing of digital documents
  - Ms Word basics and advance
  - Ms Excel basics, calculation and functions
  - PowerPoint presentation design

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  - student has not attended 80% of the online classes.
  - the student has not provided any medical report to justify his/her absences
  - student has not completed and submitted at least, half of the assignments and projects

  Satisfactory

  - student has attended 80% of the online classes.
  - student has completed and submitted at least, more than half of the assignments and projects on the course, with some recognisable errors.
  - student has written and submitted a reflective essay- self-evaluation.

  Good

  - student has attended 80% of the online classes.
  - student has completed and submitted all the required assignments and project on time, with minor errors
  - student has written and submitted a reflective essay- self-evaluation.

  Excellent

  - student has attended 80% of the online classes.
  - student has completed and submitted all the required assignments and project on time, with no errors
  - student has written and submitted a reflective essay- self-evaluation.

•   Information and Communication Technology Skills 3B00DW15-3006 09.09.2021-31.12.2021  3 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course focuses on learning the basic concepts of information communication technology (ICT) and how to use computers in business perspective. The widely known MS-Office package is in use, with practical approach.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Use computer and its operating system.
  • Create documents, calculations, presentations and communicate by using MS-Office.
  • Further develop their practical ICT skills.

  Course contents

  • How to make business documents, where to save and how to print?
  • How to make business spreadsheet calculations and charts?
  • How to make business presentations?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student knows the basic ICT terms, is familiar with the basic MS Office tools (Excel, PowerPoint, and Word), and can use them. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student is able to use a cloud environment for sharing information. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studying but may still need some support or supervision for using the tools and working in a group.

  Good

  The student recognises well the basic ICT terms, is familiar with the basic MS Office tools (Excel, PowerPoint, Word) and can tailor their use based on the outcome required. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student uses cloud environment efficiently for sharing information. The student can do the given tasks independently and is able to support other team members.

  Excellent

  The student can broadly and independently apply the MS Office tools and cloud environment. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student is very self-confident in solving problems in his/her application area, can explain and teach the tools and methods to others and help his/her team mates in their ICT problems.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be provided on TUNI Moodle, YouTube sources etc.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Demonstration, hands-on activities.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Continuous assessment and self-evaluation will be used. Peer-evaluation will encourage students to improve their understanding.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  09.09.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  02.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 25

  Teacher(s)

  Emmanuel Abruquah

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  3 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Prior completion of a similar course, certificate of completion etc.

  Exam schedule

  There will be no exams. The evaluation will be based on attaining 80% of attendance and completion of the assignments and projects.

  International connections

  No!

  Students use of time and load

  Students design templates for Office Word, Excel and PowerPoint.

  Content periodicity

  - Saving and filing of digital documents
  - Ms Word basics and advance
  - Ms Excel basics, calculation and functions
  - PowerPoint presentation design

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  - student has not attended 80% of the online classes.
  - the student has not provided any medical report to justify his/her absences
  - student has not completed and submitted at least, half of the assignments and projects

  Satisfactory

  - student has attended 80% of the online classes.
  - student has completed and submitted at least, more than half of the assignments and projects on the course, with some recognisable errors.
  - student has written and submitted a reflective essay- self-evaluation.

  Good

  - student has attended 80% of the online classes.
  - student has completed and submitted all the required assignments and project on time, with minor errors
  - student has written and submitted a reflective essay- self-evaluation.

  Excellent

  - student has attended 80% of the online classes.
  - student has completed and submitted all the required assignments and project on time, with no errors
  - student has written and submitted a reflective essay- self-evaluation.

•   Innovations and Business Management 3B00DW45-3003 30.08.2021-11.10.2021  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Learning outcomes of the course:
  The course provides a theoretical overview and the tools for creating innovations for profitable business. Using service creation as a tool, it provides insights of product and services development process and the positioning of innovation into right marketplace. Also, creating a reasonable business model and basics of ensuring the intellectual property rights (IPR’s) are discussed.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  • Understand the different aspects of innovation, and its role in developing a business
  • Recognize, assess and suggests solutions for supporting organizations innovation performance
  • Apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings
  • Evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services
  • Understand the product and service design process phases
  • Identify the critical phases of product and service design projects

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  How to foster innovations?
  How to develop products and services from innovations?
  What are intellectual property rights and how to ensure them?
  How to evaluate project business feasibility?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing a business. He/she can recognise solutions for supporting an organisation’s innovation performance. The student is able to apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings. He/she can evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student recognises the different phases in the product and service design process.

  Good

  The student is familiar with the different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing and growing a business. He/she can recognise and assess solutions for supporting an organisation’s innovation performance. The student understands the strategies most effective for exploiting innovations. The student is able to apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings. He/she can evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student can plan, implement and assess the different phases of the product and service design process. He/she can identify critical phases of product and service design projects.

  Excellent

  The student has in-depth understanding of the different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing and growing a business. He/she can recognise, assess and advocate the most suitable solutions for improving an organisation's innovation performance. The student can develop and implement the most effective strategies for exploiting innovations. The student is able to implement innovation theories into practice in a variety of business settings. He/she can boost the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student can plan, implement and assess the different phases of the product and service design process. He/she can tackle critical phases of product and service design projects.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sven Rassl

  Recommended or required reading

  Kim, W.Chan & Mauborgne, Renee: Blue Ocean Strategy or Blue Ocean Shift
  Selected articles available in Moodle

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will be delivered online using Tuni Moodle. Live sessions will be held via Zoom.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Individual learning diary
  Team assignments
  Active participation in the contact sessions and teamwork.
  More detailed assessment criteria will be given in the first contact session.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  30.08.2021 - 11.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 30.08.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Tuula Andersson, Sven Rassl

  Further information for students

  Teachers:
  Sven Rassl and Tuula Andersson

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  5 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Exam schedule

  There's no exam. The course evaluation is based on the individual learning diary and 1-2 team/pair exercises. Upgrading of the final grade is possible with an extra assignment which must be discussed with the instructors.

  Students use of time and load

  The course is worth 5 credits, which means a total workload of 135 hours. Contact teaching is appr. 27 hours and the rest is students' independent work.

  Content periodicity

  During the two first weeks of the course there will be two contact sessions / week, and after that 1 session / week. During the 3rd week the course "Consultation Projects" will start. It is the practical part of the study module where the learnings of this course will be implemented.

•   International Brand Management 3B00DW57-3002 18.01.2022-22.04.2022  5 cr  (20IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is executed in co-operation with TAMK international partner universities. The students work with a branding project in teams consisting of members from several universities, using virtual communication tools: social media, video meetings and cloud services. In the project the students will learn how to analyze and develop a brand in an international context but quite as importantly how to deal with cultural differences in an international project.
  
  After completing the course the students will be able to
  - describe and apply a theoretical framework for developing a
  brand
  - analyze and evaluate strengths and development areas of a
  brand
  - create or develop a brand strategy for a product, service or a
  company
  - work in an international project using virtual communication
  tools

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing 1 and 2 or equivalent

  Course contents

  How do international companies manage their brand development?
  Which aspects in consumer behavior are crucial in the brand marketing?
  How to cope with cultural differences affecting project work in an international context?
  How to use modern virtual communication tools in an international project?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to recognise the basic concepts of branding. He/she is able to conduct his/her part and participate in the brand strategy development assignment, with assistance, following instructions. The student participates in the international teamwork and is able to recognise his/her contribution to the task.

  Good

  The student is able to explain the structure of brand strategy and brand image as tools of brand management. He/she is able to research the business environment of a brand for developing a brand strategy. The student is able to develop a brand strategy plan. The student acts as an active member of an international project team, takes responsibility of his/her own work and is able to co-operate in a multinational team also by using virtual communication tools.

  Excellent

  The student is able to analyse the theoretical concepts of branding and apply them in the branding assignment in an excellent manner. He/she is able to develop different solutions for the brand challenge based on the research and assess different alternatives. The student is able to creatively apply the theoretical tools to develop a well reasoned brand strategy. The student takes a leading role in the international teamwork or part of it, can co-operate flexibly and constructively taking into account the cultural differences of the participants and thereby develop the group’s interaction.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Annikka Lepola

  Recommended or required reading

  Examples of literature related to the topic:
  Floor, K. 2006. Branding a Store. Amsterdam: BIS Publishers
  Finne S., Sivonen H. 2009. The Retail Value Chain
  Jansen. M.2006. Brand Prototyping
  Usunier, J. 2000. Marketing across cultures
  Edwards, H., Day, D.2005. Creating Passion Brands: How to build emotional brand connection with customers.
  Aaker D. Building strong brands

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Studying is mainly based on students’ team work around a business case, coached by the teachers from TAMK and the partner universities. The students work in in international teams with members from the partner universities. Coaching will be arranged partially in the class, if possible, and partially online.
  Regular virtual meetings and conferences are an essential part of the course.
  The theoretical part will be studied by lectures and self-study materials.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Course evaluation comprises of the
  - Products (deliverables): completing the theoretical part, research and brand strategy report and presentation. The presentation will be evaluated and graded also by the commissioner.
  - Process: agreeing and documenting the team rules and meetings, active participation & communication in an international team including self, peer and teacher evaluation.
  Both part must be completed in an acceptable manner.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.01.2022 - 22.04.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  Seats

  0 - 30

  Teacher(s)

  Tuula Andersson, Annikka Lepola

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  5 cr

  Virtual proportion

  4 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Training and labour cooperation

  A Dutch bicycle company will give the students the branding challenge.

  Exam schedule

  No exam. The students should realize that it is very difficult to improve the final grade afterwards because the evaluation is based not only on the output of the project but also on the teamwork skills.

  International connections

  This course is executed in cooperation with TAMK Business Administration, Brno University of Technology in Czech Republic, Stenden University of Applied Sciences, Windesheim University of Applied Sciences in the Netherlands and a Belgian university.

  Students use of time and load

  Student time use 135 hours altogether. Generally there are 2 * 3 "class" hours per week. Part of the class hours (appr. 60 hours) will be reserved for working with the project and part of them for branding theory. However, students should notice that a great deal of the execution will be done outside class hours (135 - 60 = 75 hours)
  Week x will be an intensive week and the students should prepare themselves to work with this course also outside the regular class hours.

•   International Business Path Studies TK00FQ83-3001 24.08.2021-31.07.2022  60 cr  (AVOINAMK) +-
  Course contents

  Studies consist of first year studies of the degree programme.
  
  You will study full time in the degree programme´s student group. There are two (2) study places for open UAS students. The studies are conducted in English. Path studies in English require good oral and written English language skills.
  
  The enrollment will start on 2 August at 9 am and end on 4 August at 11.59 pm. If there are still study places left after the enrollment period ends, the period may be continued. The registration form can be found on the “How to apply or register” tab. Places are filled on a first-come-first-serve basis and registration is done in our online store. Payment cannot be made upon registration, but an invoice will be sent to you later, if you are accepted into the path studies. Please note that you can sign up for one path studies option.
  
  It is not possible to get student financial aid or other student benefits for the open UAS studies. Open University studies do not allow you to get residence permit in Finland.
  
  If you are a registered jobseeker at the Employment and Economic Development Office, make sure that you can participate in the studies before registering as a path student.
  
  The fee for the open path studies is 300 euros per year. Invoice is sent in the autumn.
  
  The fee for the first year is the same for all students. When you become a degree student and are a non-EU/EEA student, you will have a tuition fee like all the other non-EU/EEA –students.
  
  You can apply for admission to the degree programme based on your Open UAS studies. If you start path studies in the autumn 2021, you will be able to apply to become a degree student in the application on the basis of Open UAS studies in studyinfo.fi in May 2022.
  Student selection is made considering your completed amount of credit points and study success. Study success means your grade point average of the studies completed during your Open UAS Path Studies. If necessary, students are placed in order by their GPA (highest to lowest).
  Required amount of credit points (Bachelor in International Business 50-60 credit points) should be completed by 31 July 2022.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Suvi Hokkanen

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  24.08.2021 - 31.07.2022

  Registration

  25.07.2021 - 23.08.2021

  Credits

  60 cr

  Group(s)

  AVOINAMK

  Seats

  0 - 8

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

•   International Practical Training 3B00DX09-3001 01.08.2021-31.12.2021  30 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Practical training will familiarize the students in a supervised manner with the practical work assignments of the field studied as well as application of knowledge and skills in working life. In the International Business programme, the Finnish students look for a practical training place abroad, while the foreign students seek for a job in Finland.
  
  The International Practical Training (5 months = 30 credits) must be a full-time position. The training can be done in no more than two parts. The shortest accepted full-time position can be of one month in length. Before starting the international practical training, the students will need to participate in a practical training orientation program, which will be arranged during the late autumn term of the second year. The student must contact the Practical Training Supervisor well in advance before the work placement and a written agreement on the practical training is required.
  
  After and during the practical training, the students will be able to:
  
  Learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life.
  Apply learned theory and skills with practice.
  Learn practicalities of the field studied.
  Be able to plan their career based on their practical training experience.
  Create networks with the employer and the working life.
  Collect ideas for the final thesis.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What does supervised practical training mean?
  What are the tasks of a BBA?
  How to act as a member of a work community?
  What are my strengths and ‘development areas’ in the working life?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass:
  
  
  
  The student completes practical training for the required length in practical assignments in their field of study. He/she is able to apply the rules, knowledge and skills to their practical training. All the required documentation is submitted to the practical training supervisor and the feedback discussion takes place. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility of his/her own work.
  
  
  
  Fail:
  
  The student has does not complete the required length of practical training in their field of study. The required documents are not submitted to the supervisor, and no feedback discussion takes place with the practical training supervisor.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Janne Hopeela

  Recommended or required reading

  Guidelines for Practical Training are discussed during the Practical Training Orientation. Description of Practical Training can be found in IB Curriculum and more detailed guidelines in TAMK Intra, student's handbook.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Before starting the practical training the students will need to participate in a Practical Training Orientation which will be arranged during the autumn term of the second study year. The student must contact the Practical Training Supervisor at TAMK well in advance before signing the practical training agreement. A written agreement is always required. Students will have a supervisor both in the company and at TAMK during their practical training. Students are writing reports and weekly diaries during the practical training period.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  During the practical training the TAMK BBA students are building their knowledge and practical skills in the field of their chosen mandatory module of the TAMK BBA programme. Evaluation is based on practical training reports and final discussion after the practical training period -> pass.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  30 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Marita Tuomala, Janne Hopeela

  Further information for students

  For more information please contact either:
  Marita Tuomala; marita.tuomala@tuni.fi or
  Janne Hopeela; janne.hopeela@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  Pass/Fail

  Completion alternatives

  In case of accreditation of your previous work experience please contact either Ms. Tuomala or Mr. Hopeela

  Training and labour cooperation

  During the practical training period the students will learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life. Students will find the work placement themselves. Students are able to use TAMK's JobTeaser portal to find internships.

  Exam schedule

  No exam. Students are writing reports and weekly diaries during the practical training period.

  International connections

  Finnish degree students are recommended to look for practical training positions abroad and foreign degree students either in Finland or abroad. We have some international connections; please contact your practical training supervisors.

  Students use of time and load

  The practical training is 30 ECTS which equals 5 months of full-time work (20 working weeks). The practical training can be done in no more than two parts.

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass - when all the required reports and a copy of the work certificate have been returned to the practical training supervisor and the feedback discussion has taken place between the student and the practical training supervisor at TAMK.

•   International Trade and Contracts 3B00DW01-3008 01.01.2022-06.03.2022  3 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to practices of international trade and to legal framework in international trade transactions. This course consists of two parts A. Practices of International Trade and B. Introduction to International Law and Contracts.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices.
  • Define the terms of delivery (Incoterms) and know how to use them.
  • Explain and describe the main international payment methods and key documents in export process.
  • Explain how to use INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance in foreign trade.
  • Know the basic concepts of contract law and contract terms commonly used in international agreements.
  • Identify situations where CISG applies and what the basic obligations of a seller and a buyer are under CISG.
  • Know what a breach of contract means and the possible remedies for a breach of contract.
  • Know the differences between common dispute resolution mechanisms.

  Course contents

  • What are the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices?
  • How does one use international delivery terms - Incoterms in offers and contracts?
  • What are the main international payment methods and key documents in foreign trade?
  • What are INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance and when are they needed?
  • What are the main principles of contract law in international trade?
  • What is the scope of application of the CISG and what are the basic obligations of parties?
  • How can contractual disputes be resolved and what are the sanctions for breach of contract?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise, name and define basic concepts and terms in international trade and international contract law. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to explain, compare and apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law. The student can solve problems in case studies and assignments and justify his/her choice. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student can apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law extensively and is able to analyse and relate them to professional context. The student is able to assess diverse solution alternatives in case studies and assignments. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Marita Tuomala

  Recommended or required reading

  ICC Guide to Export / Import - Global Business Standards and Strategies by Guillermo C. Jimenez. ICC Publications 2018. Fifth Edition.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  PART A / Tuomala: International Trade; Contact teaching in class, exercises, assignments, exam in Moodle
  PART B / Leino: International Contracts - starting week 6; Contact teaching online, materials and assignments in Moodle

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Grading scale 0 - 5. Total Grade: PART A. 70 % + PART B. 30 %

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2022 - 06.03.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Teacher(s)

  Marita Tuomala, Tomi Leino

  Further information for students

  Further information:
  Marita Tuomala
  marita.tuomala@tuni.fi
  tel. + 358 40 846 8057

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  1 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Training and labour cooperation

  None

  Exam schedule

  PART A: Exam dates will be informed later
  PART B. Exam dates will be informed later

  International connections

  None

  Students use of time and load

  3 ECTS = 80 hours student time usage
  PART A: 2 ECTS: About 20 hours lectures + 20 hours studying the course literature and materials + 10 hours making the L/C assignment and other assignments
  PART B: 1 ECTS: About 30 hours; lectures + assignments

  Content periodicity

  Part A: Practices of International trade; weeks 2 - 8
  Part B: International Law and Contracts; weeks 6 - 10
  The detailed course plan will be introduced during the first class.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student is not able to name or define the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law. The student has failed in exam / exams and / or mandatory assignments.

  Satisfactory

  Student has limited knowledge of the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 1 - 2. The student is able to list, define and explain the basic concepts and terms in mandatory assignments.

  Good

  Student has good knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 3 - 4. The student is able to use and apply the terms and concepts well in simple tasks and mandatory assignments.

  Excellent

  Student has excellent knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in an exam grade 5. The student masters the terms and concepts of the subject matter in an excellent manner and is able to apply and analyse the terms and concepts extensively in mandatory assignments and challenging case studies.

•   International Trade and Contracts 3B00DW01-3009 01.01.2022-06.03.2022  3 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to practices of international trade and to legal framework in international trade transactions. This course consists of two parts A. Practices of International Trade and B. Introduction to International Law and Contracts.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices.
  • Define the terms of delivery (Incoterms) and know how to use them.
  • Explain and describe the main international payment methods and key documents in export process.
  • Explain how to use INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance in foreign trade.
  • Know the basic concepts of contract law and contract terms commonly used in international agreements.
  • Identify situations where CISG applies and what the basic obligations of a seller and a buyer are under CISG.
  • Know what a breach of contract means and the possible remedies for a breach of contract.
  • Know the differences between common dispute resolution mechanisms.

  Course contents

  • What are the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices?
  • How does one use international delivery terms - Incoterms in offers and contracts?
  • What are the main international payment methods and key documents in foreign trade?
  • What are INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance and when are they needed?
  • What are the main principles of contract law in international trade?
  • What is the scope of application of the CISG and what are the basic obligations of parties?
  • How can contractual disputes be resolved and what are the sanctions for breach of contract?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognise, name and define basic concepts and terms in international trade and international contract law. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

  Good

  The student is able to explain, compare and apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law. The student can solve problems in case studies and assignments and justify his/her choice. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student can apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law extensively and is able to analyse and relate them to professional context. The student is able to assess diverse solution alternatives in case studies and assignments. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Marita Tuomala

  Recommended or required reading

  ICC Guide to Export / Import - Global Business Standards and Strategies by Guillermo C. Jimenez. ICC Publications 2018. Fifth Edition.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  PART A / Tuomala: International Trade; Contact teaching in class, exercises, assignments, exam in Moodle
  PART B / Leino: International Contracts - starting week 6; Contact teaching online, materials and assignments in Moodle

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Grading scale 0 - 5. Total Grade: PART A. 70 % + PART B. 30 %

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2022 - 06.03.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Marita Tuomala, Tomi Leino

  Further information for students

  Further information:
  Marita Tuomala
  marita.tuomala@tuni.fi
  tel. + 358 40 846 8057

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  1 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Training and labour cooperation

  None

  Exam schedule

  PART A: Exam dates will be informed later
  PART B. Exam dates will be informed later

  International connections

  None

  Students use of time and load

  3 ECTS = 80 hours student time usage
  PART A: 2 ECTS: About 20 hours lectures + 20 hours studying the course literature and materials + 10 hours making the L/C assignment and other assignments
  PART B: 1 ECTS: About 30 hours; lectures + assignments

  Content periodicity

  Part A: Practices of International trade; weeks 2 - 8
  Part B: International Law and Contracts; weeks 6 - 10
  The detailed course plan will be introduced during the first class.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student is not able to name or define the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law. The student has failed in exam / exams and / or mandatory assignments.

  Satisfactory

  Student has limited knowledge of the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 1 - 2. The student is able to list, define and explain the basic concepts and terms in mandatory assignments.

  Good

  Student has good knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 3 - 4. The student is able to use and apply the terms and concepts well in simple tasks and mandatory assignments.

  Excellent

  Student has excellent knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in an exam grade 5. The student masters the terms and concepts of the subject matter in an excellent manner and is able to apply and analyse the terms and concepts extensively in mandatory assignments and challenging case studies.

•   Introduction to Accounting 3B00DV85-3006 01.09.2021-17.10.2021  2 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course, ABC of accounting, introduces the fundamentals of company accounting principles and practices. The perspective is practical, including both financial and management accounting themes.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • understand the role and relevancy of finance function within a company
  • understand relevant finance and accounting terminology
  • utilize key finance and accounting elements of a company

  Course contents

  • What are Profit & Loss, Balance sheet and Cash Flow?
  • What are financial and management accounting about?
  • What is double entry bookkeeping system?
  • How to evaluate business financials?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognizes the role of accounting in a company and relevant accounting principles and practices. The student can name the most relevant topics in financial accounting and sees the purpose of operating a business. The student identifies the principles of bookkeeping and financial statements and can make basic bookkeeping postings. He/she recognizes the key principles of Finnish business taxation and legal obligations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner, and act as part of a team.

  Good

  The student is able to structure the connection between profitability, balance sheet and cash flow. The student can apply the principles of double entry postings and name the phases of year end close. The student is able to apply calculations for VAT, payroll and other obligations; he/she can make simple year end closings based on financial accounting process. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop his/her interaction skills, adding value to the team.

  Excellent

  The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He/she expands the context with curiosity and analyses the course themes actively. The student finds the path towards academic approach and uses relevant information sources. The student is able to evaluate and assess financial accounting processes and build creative solutions by combining the course themes. The student pays needed attention to detail in cases, looks for alternative perspectives. The student uses feedback to iterate the learning process. The student is able to develop creative and constructive working methods and bring professional commitment throughout the course.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  the course slides, other materials to be informed during the lectures

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact teaching and selected exercises, on-line teaching as needed

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.09.2021 - 17.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Exam schedule

  To be informed during the first course lecture

  Students use of time and load

  The course is 2 credits, 54 hours of student work

  Content periodicity

  The course is focused on introducing the fundamentals of accounting, specially financial accounting. The selected themes by the sessions are specified during the first lecture.

•   Introduction to Accounting 3B00DV85-3007 01.09.2021-17.10.2021  2 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course, ABC of accounting, introduces the fundamentals of company accounting principles and practices. The perspective is practical, including both financial and management accounting themes.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • understand the role and relevancy of finance function within a company
  • understand relevant finance and accounting terminology
  • utilize key finance and accounting elements of a company

  Course contents

  • What are Profit & Loss, Balance sheet and Cash Flow?
  • What are financial and management accounting about?
  • What is double entry bookkeeping system?
  • How to evaluate business financials?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognizes the role of accounting in a company and relevant accounting principles and practices. The student can name the most relevant topics in financial accounting and sees the purpose of operating a business. The student identifies the principles of bookkeeping and financial statements and can make basic bookkeeping postings. He/she recognizes the key principles of Finnish business taxation and legal obligations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner, and act as part of a team.

  Good

  The student is able to structure the connection between profitability, balance sheet and cash flow. The student can apply the principles of double entry postings and name the phases of year end close. The student is able to apply calculations for VAT, payroll and other obligations; he/she can make simple year end closings based on financial accounting process. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop his/her interaction skills, adding value to the team.

  Excellent

  The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He/she expands the context with curiosity and analyses the course themes actively. The student finds the path towards academic approach and uses relevant information sources. The student is able to evaluate and assess financial accounting processes and build creative solutions by combining the course themes. The student pays needed attention to detail in cases, looks for alternative perspectives. The student uses feedback to iterate the learning process. The student is able to develop creative and constructive working methods and bring professional commitment throughout the course.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  the course slides, other materials to be informed during the lectures

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact teaching and selected exercises, on-line teaching as needed

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.09.2021 - 17.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Exam schedule

  To be informed during the first course lecture

  Students use of time and load

  The course is 2 credits, 54 hours of student work

  Content periodicity

  The course is focused on introducing the fundamentals of accounting, specially financial accounting. The selected themes by the sessions are specified during the first lecture.

•   Introduction to Business Operations and Legal Aspects 3B00DV83-3005 30.08.2021-06.10.2021  3 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to company processes and functions in a modern business environment. The aim is to cover the essentials for business operations and introduce the key legal aspects of setting up a business in Finland and choosing a company legal type. The students will learn to search for and apply professionally significant legal information.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • have a good insight into functions of modern business environment.
  • adopt the principles of business profitability, liquidity and solvency.
  • analyze the interdependence of various business variables.
  • indentify and use the key sources of Finnish law
  • describe the type of enterprise and their key differences
  • understand the procedures required to establish a company
  • draw up documents for the formation and registration of a company

  Course contents

  • What is a company and business operations?
  • How to evaluate and measure the success of a business?
  • What is organisational structure and its functions?
  • What are the key sources of law and how to utilize them?
  • Who has the right to trade in Finland
  • What legal considerations are relevant to setting up a business?
  • What are the key differences between the company legal forms?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

  Good

  The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

  Excellent

  The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Elena Grigorova

  Recommended or required reading

  Business Operations:
  • Online resources and materials in Moodle
  Legal Aspects (required reading):
  • Surakka, Aapo. (2012). Access to Finnish law. Talentum Media. Pages 16–25 and 88–102.
  Available in digital form in TAMK-Finna Alma Talent Verkkokirjahylly.
  • Items covered in class, and
  • Materials in Moodle

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lectures, group work, self-study

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Introduction to Business Operations (2 cr):
  - Individual exam (70%)
  - Participation in classroom discussions and group work (30%)
  Legal Aspects (1 cr):
  - Individual exam (70%)
  - Active participation and group work in class and online (30%)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  30.08.2021 - 06.10.2021

  Registration

  01.06.2021 - 01.09.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Jarmo Koivuniemi, Elena Grigorova

  Further information for students

  Mandatory attendance: 80%

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Exam schedule

  Business Operations:
  Written exam - 13.10.2021 14:00 - 17:00 D1-04
  The exam may be moved online if the COVID-19 situation deteriorates.
  Re-take dates and times to be announced later.

  Students use of time and load

  Contact lessons 21 hours (7 x 3 h)
  Independent study 60 hours

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

  Good

  The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

  Excellent

  The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

•   Introduction to Business Operations and Legal Aspects 3B00DV83-3006 30.08.2021-06.10.2021  3 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to company processes and functions in a modern business environment. The aim is to cover the essentials for business operations and introduce the key legal aspects of setting up a business in Finland and choosing a company legal type. The students will learn to search for and apply professionally significant legal information.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • have a good insight into functions of modern business environment.
  • adopt the principles of business profitability, liquidity and solvency.
  • analyze the interdependence of various business variables.
  • indentify and use the key sources of Finnish law
  • describe the type of enterprise and their key differences
  • understand the procedures required to establish a company
  • draw up documents for the formation and registration of a company

  Course contents

  • What is a company and business operations?
  • How to evaluate and measure the success of a business?
  • What is organisational structure and its functions?
  • What are the key sources of law and how to utilize them?
  • Who has the right to trade in Finland
  • What legal considerations are relevant to setting up a business?
  • What are the key differences between the company legal forms?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

  Good

  The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

  Excellent

  The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Elena Grigorova

  Recommended or required reading

  Business Operations:
  • Online resources and materials in Moodle
  Legal Aspects (required reading):
  • Surakka, Aapo. (2012). Access to Finnish law. Talentum Media. Pages 16–25 and 88–102.
  Available in digital form in TAMK-Finna Alma Talent Verkkokirjahylly.
  • Items covered in class, and
  • Materials in Moodle

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lectures, group work, self-study

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Introduction to Business Operations (2 cr):
  - Individual exam (70%)
  - Participation in classroom discussions and group work (30%)
  Legal Aspects (1 cr):
  - Individual exam (70%)
  - Active participation and group work in class and online (30%)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  30.08.2021 - 06.10.2021

  Registration

  01.06.2021 - 01.09.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Jarmo Koivuniemi, Elena Grigorova

  Further information for students

  Mandatory attendance: 80%

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Exam schedule

  Business Operations:
  Written exam - 13.10.2021 14:00 - 17:00 D1-04
  The exam may be moved online if the COVID-19 situation deteriorates.
  Re-take dates and times to be announced later.

  Students use of time and load

  Contact lessons 21 hours (7 x 3 h)
  Independent study 60 hours

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

  Good

  The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

  Excellent

  The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

•   Introduction to Experience Economy 3B00DV87-3006 06.09.2021-17.10.2021  2 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Selling goods and services is not enough in modern economy. There is a need to consider the extra value of business supply by designing holistic, multisensory experiences for customers. Tourism is a typical business sector to implement experience economy characteristics and benefit from it.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand and identify the nature and the characteristics of experience economy.
  • Comprehend the characteristics of tourism business
  • Apply theories of experience economy, tourist motivational factors and tourist typology in business planning

  Course contents

  • What is experience economy about and how can we recognize it in modern world?
  • What kind of a phenomenon is tourism and what are the main types of tourism business?
  • How to apply the characteristics of tourism phenomenon in business planning?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and define the basic concepts of the experience economy in the context of tourism. The student is able to discuss and consider some characteristics of the experience economy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility on his/her own work.

  Good

  The student is able to explain, compare and apply the theories of the experience economy and tourism. The student can make plans, solve problems, and choose an appropriate course of action. The student can take responsibility and commit to the group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student can generalise and analyse extensive entities and relations between the concepts and theories of the experience economy. The student can search for diverse courses of action and solution alternatives and assess these alternatives. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  See Moodle page for the most relevant material on experience economy (at this point of your studies). Also additional inspirational material will be given by the teacher during lectures. It is recommended that the student also acquires own suitable material for one's own learning and the task at hand.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course combines online lectures, reading, discussion and peer-to-peer interaction as well as a group work assignment. The main assignment deals with analysing a selected service/product/attraction/destination/event/a restaurant/a museum or such from the perspective of experientialism, the experiential value of it, key characteristics that make (or break) the meaningful experience. Also, the team can identify ways to improve the customer's experience and how to turn a mere nice service experience into a more memorable and emotional one. The assignment is completed in small groups; the IB student teams are split into two small groups of 3-4 students.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  06.09.2021 - 17.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Mika Kylänen, Sari Matala

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  No alternative means of completion.

  Students use of time and load

  2 ECTS equals 54 hours of student work, as 1 ECTS credit = 26,7 hours. The work load is divided between joint teacher driven sessions as well as group and individual work approximately online contact session (3 x 2 h = 6 hours), individual reading tasks and material search (~12 hours) and group work assignment (36 hours). So, the student should book at least roughly one work week's time within a time frame of 9 Sept - 17 Oct to complete the main assignment to be completed in groups.
  Online contact session:
  9.9. Implementation 3006 Zoom-meeting at 14-16: Introduction to the course, Tasks, Start studying material (individual/team work) !
  24.9. Implementation 3006 Zoom meeting at 12-14: Lecture: Experience Economy, discussing the task
  30.9. Implementation 3006 Zoom meeting at 11-13: Check point, coaching
  
  The group assignment has to be sumbitted in Moodle on 17th October latest.

  Content periodicity

  First session/week: Introduction to the course, Tasks, Start studying material (individual/team work)
  Second session/week: Experience Economy, discussing the task
  Third session/week: Check point, coaching
  Also, individual and group work.

•   Introduction to Experience Economy 3B00DV87-3007 06.09.2021-17.10.2021  2 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Selling goods and services is not enough in modern economy. There is a need to consider the extra value of business supply by designing holistic, multisensory experiences for customers. Tourism is a typical business sector to implement experience economy characteristics and benefit from it.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand and identify the nature and the characteristics of experience economy.
  • Comprehend the characteristics of tourism business
  • Apply theories of experience economy, tourist motivational factors and tourist typology in business planning

  Course contents

  • What is experience economy about and how can we recognize it in modern world?
  • What kind of a phenomenon is tourism and what are the main types of tourism business?
  • How to apply the characteristics of tourism phenomenon in business planning?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and define the basic concepts of the experience economy in the context of tourism. The student is able to discuss and consider some characteristics of the experience economy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility on his/her own work.

  Good

  The student is able to explain, compare and apply the theories of the experience economy and tourism. The student can make plans, solve problems, and choose an appropriate course of action. The student can take responsibility and commit to the group activities in addition to his/her own work.

  Excellent

  The student can generalise and analyse extensive entities and relations between the concepts and theories of the experience economy. The student can search for diverse courses of action and solution alternatives and assess these alternatives. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  See Moodle page for the most relevant material on experience economy (at this point of your studies). Also additional inspirational material will be given by the teacher during lectures. It is recommended that the student also acquires own suitable material for one's own learning and the task at hand.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course combines online lectures, reading, discussion and peer-to-peer interaction as well as a group work assignment. The main assignment deals with analysing a selected service/product/attraction/destination/event/a restaurant/a museum or such from the perspective of experientialism, the experiential value of it, key characteristics that make (or break) the meaningful experience. Also, the team can identify ways to improve the customer's experience and how to turn a mere nice service experience into a more memorable and emotional one. The assignment is completed in small groups; the IB student teams are split into two small groups of 3-4 students.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  06.09.2021 - 17.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Mika Kylänen, Sari Matala

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  No alternative means of completion.

  Students use of time and load

  2 ECTS equals 54 hours of student work, as 1 ECTS credit = 26,7 hours. The work load is divided between joint teacher driven sessions as well as group and individual work approximately online contact session (3 x 2 h = 6 hours), individual reading tasks and material search (~12 hours) and group work assignment (36 hours). So, the student should book at least roughly one work week's time within a time frame of 7 Sept - 17 Oct to complete the main assignment to be completed in groups.
  Online contact session:
  7.9. Implementation 3007 Zoom-meeting at 9-11: Introduction to the course, Tasks, Start studying material (individual/team work) !
  24.9. Implementation 3007 Zoom-meeting at 8-10: Lecture: Experience Economy, discussing the task
  30.9. Implementation 3007 Zoom meeting at 14-16: Check point, coaching
  
  The group assignment has to be sumbitted in Moodle on 17th October latest.

  Content periodicity

  First session/week: Introduction to the course, Tasks, Start studying material (individual/team work)
  Second session/week: Experience Economy, discussing the task
  Third session/week: Check point, coaching
  Also, individual and group work.

•   Introduction to Marketing 1 3B00DV81-3006 03.09.2021-08.10.2021  2 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
  in business management.
  • Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
  customer needs.
  • Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
  practice.
  • Write a marketing plan for their business.

  Course contents

  • What is marketing and what do marketers do?
  • How to create customer value and experience?
  • How to analyse marketing environment and collect marketing information?
  • What are products, services and brands?
  • How to do pricing?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and name the basic concepts of marketing. He/she can use the basic terms in a correct way and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted, and work in a team and take responsibility of his/her own work.

  Good

  The student is able to make a marketing plan accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. The student has participated in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands extensively the concepts and principles of marketing. The student is able to conduct a fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student combines different solution alternatives creatively or creates new ones. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student cooperates responsibly, flexibly and constructively.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books (Kotler, Armstrong, Parment: Principles of Marketing, 2nd Scandinavian Edition
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped classroom sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Independent study and research

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  03.09.2021 - 08.10.2021

  Registration

  02.07.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 45

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Project work / case studies

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Cases and discussion, global operational business environment

  Students use of time and load

  According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Details given in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and name the basic concepts of marketing. He/she can use the basic terms in a correct way and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted, and work in a team and take responsibility of his/her own work.

  Good

  The student is able to make a marketing plan accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. The student has participated in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands extensively the concepts and principles of marketing. The student is able to conduct a fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student combines different solution alternatives creatively or create new ones. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active. The student cooperates responsibly, flexibly and constructively.

•   Introduction to Marketing 1 3B00DV81-3007 03.09.2021-08.10.2021  2 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
  in business management.
  • Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
  customer needs.
  • Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
  practice.
  • Write a marketing plan for their business.

  Course contents

  • What is marketing and what do marketers do?
  • How to create customer value and experience?
  • How to analyse marketing environment and collect marketing information?
  • What are products, services and brands?
  • How to do pricing?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and name the basic concepts of marketing. He/she can use the basic terms in a correct way and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted, and work in a team and take responsibility of his/her own work.

  Good

  The student is able to make a marketing plan accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. The student has participated in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands extensively the concepts and principles of marketing. The student is able to conduct a fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student combines different solution alternatives creatively or creates new ones. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student cooperates responsibly, flexibly and constructively.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books (Kotler, Armstrong, Parment: Principles of Marketing, 2nd Scandinavian Edition
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped classroom sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Independent study and research

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  03.09.2021 - 08.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 45

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Project work / case studies

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Cases and discussion, global operational business environment

  Students use of time and load

  According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Details given in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and name the basic concepts of marketing. He/she can use the basic terms in a correct way and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted, and work in a team and take responsibility of his/her own work.

  Good

  The student is able to make a marketing plan accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. The student has participated in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands extensively the concepts and principles of marketing. The student is able to conduct a fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student combines different solution alternatives creatively or create new ones. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active. The student cooperates responsibly, flexibly and constructively.

•   Introduction to Marketing 2 3B00DV89-3006 18.10.2021-31.12.2021  2 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
  in business management.
  • Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
  customer needs.
  • Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
  practice.
  • Write a marketing plan.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing 1

  Course contents

  • What is modern multichannel marketing?
  • What are examples of doing advertising, PR; personal selling and sales
  promotion?
  • How to do direct, online, social media and mobile marketing?
  • What is sustainable marketing?
  • How to write a marketing plan for a business and create website contents?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and define the basics of modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix. He/she can use the basic terms and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted. The student takes responsibility of his/her own work and can work in a group.

  Good

  The student applies modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix in marketing planning accordingly and solves the problems associated with it. The student participates in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the outcome with his/her knowledge. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands the concepts and principles of marketing extensively. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. He/she assesses diverse solution alternatives in marketing planning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles
  - Case studies
  - Videos
  - Assigned E-books

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped classroom sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Independent study and research

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.10.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  18.09.2021 - 17.10.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 45

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  International case studies, project collaboration with students from Brno University of Technology

  Students use of time and load

  According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions. Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and workshops
  - Write a marketing plan
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Details given in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and define the basics of modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix. He/she can use the basic terms and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted. The student takes responsibility of his/her own work and can work in a group.

  Good

  The student applies modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix in marketing planning accordingly and solves the problems associated with it. The student participates in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the outcome with his/her knowledge. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands the concepts and principles of marketing extensively. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. He/she assesses diverse solution alternatives in marketing planning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner.

•   Introduction to Marketing 2 3B00DV89-3007 18.10.2021-31.12.2021  2 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
  in business management.
  • Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
  customer needs.
  • Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
  practice.
  • Write a marketing plan.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing 1

  Course contents

  • What is modern multichannel marketing?
  • What are examples of doing advertising, PR; personal selling and sales
  promotion?
  • How to do direct, online, social media and mobile marketing?
  • What is sustainable marketing?
  • How to write a marketing plan for a business and create website contents?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and define the basics of modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix. He/she can use the basic terms and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted. The student takes responsibility of his/her own work and can work in a group.

  Good

  The student applies modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix in marketing planning accordingly and solves the problems associated with it. The student participates in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the outcome with his/her knowledge. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands the concepts and principles of marketing extensively. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. He/she assesses diverse solution alternatives in marketing planning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles
  - Case studies
  - Videos
  - Assigned E-books

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped classroom sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Independent study and research

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.10.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  18.09.2021 - 17.10.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 45

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  International case studies, project collaboration with students from Brno University of Technology

  Students use of time and load

  According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions. Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and workshops
  - Write a marketing plan
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Details given in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can recognize and define the basics of modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix. He/she can use the basic terms and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted. The student takes responsibility of his/her own work and can work in a group.

  Good

  The student applies modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix in marketing planning accordingly and solves the problems associated with it. The student participates in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the outcome with his/her knowledge. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands the concepts and principles of marketing extensively. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. He/she assesses diverse solution alternatives in marketing planning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner.

•   Introduction to Supply Chain Management 3B00DW05-3008 01.01.2022-06.03.2022  3 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course introduces the basics of Logistics and Supply Chain Management operations. The course will focus on the business and humanitarian (emergency) sides of SCM. The students will learn the basics of procurement, inventory, warehousing and transportation processes, with full integration using ERP systems such as SAP AIl in One and Business One.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the basic concepts and principles of logistics
  • Manage the logistics process in a company using ERP systems transaction such as sales orders, purchase orders, order fulfilment, product issues and inventory control.

  Course contents

  • What is Logistics and Supply Chain Management?
  • How SCM works in services, industrial and humanitarian sectors?
  • How to make and simulate real business activities in SAP?
  • How SAP works and manages the business integration?
  • What are the logistics costs and how to create value added services in SCM?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in supply chain management. The student has basic understanding of logistics in general and how it is connected to organisation's most common processes. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations regarding SCM. The student demonstrates basic skills by submitting required tasks and assignments during the course.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in (emergency) supply chain. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant working life SCM related situations. The student contributes according to teacher's expectations to tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in (emergency) supply chain. The student has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course. The student is also able to collect information from various nodes of SC and use the extracted information in SC planning, development and management, while streamlining it with proper managerial SCM-tools. The student can also use the acquired information as a basis for new, added value containing data creation. The student is able to capitalise on knowledge in the execution of organisation's daily SCM related processes.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped class sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Assigned tasks, report, exam, and participation will be evaluated.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2022 - 06.03.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Knowledge gained from the course can be applied to various roles along the supply chain's functions.

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Multiple global case studies will be used in the course

  Students use of time and load

  Students are expected to:
  - Attend sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and exam
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Themes for the course:
  - Supply chain management- the big picture
  - Service supply chains, strategy and processes
  - Logistics
  - Humanitarian supply chain management and logistics
  - Lean, JIT
  - Risks and risk management

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in supply chain management. The student has basic understanding of logistics in general and how it is connected to organisation's most common processes. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations regarding SCM. The student demonstrates basic skills by submitting required tasks and assignments during the course.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in (emergency) supply chain. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant working life SCM related situations. The student contributes according to teacher's expectations to tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in (emergency) supply chain. The student has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course. The student is also able to collect information from various nodes of SC and use the extracted information in SC planning, development and management, while streamlining it with proper managerial SCM-tools. The student can also use the acquired information as a basis for new, added value containing data creation. The student is able to capitalise on knowledge in the execution of organisation's daily SCM related processes.

•   Introduction to Supply Chain Management 3B00DW05-3009 01.01.2022-06.03.2022  3 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course introduces the basics of Logistics and Supply Chain Management operations. The course will focus on the business and humanitarian (emergency) sides of SCM. The students will learn the basics of procurement, inventory, warehousing and transportation processes, with full integration using ERP systems such as SAP AIl in One and Business One.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Describe the basic concepts and principles of logistics
  • Manage the logistics process in a company using ERP systems transaction such as sales orders, purchase orders, order fulfilment, product issues and inventory control.

  Course contents

  • What is Logistics and Supply Chain Management?
  • How SCM works in services, industrial and humanitarian sectors?
  • How to make and simulate real business activities in SAP?
  • How SAP works and manages the business integration?
  • What are the logistics costs and how to create value added services in SCM?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in supply chain management. The student has basic understanding of logistics in general and how it is connected to organisation's most common processes. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations regarding SCM. The student demonstrates basic skills by submitting required tasks and assignments during the course.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in (emergency) supply chain. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant working life SCM related situations. The student contributes according to teacher's expectations to tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in (emergency) supply chain. The student has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course. The student is also able to collect information from various nodes of SC and use the extracted information in SC planning, development and management, while streamlining it with proper managerial SCM-tools. The student can also use the acquired information as a basis for new, added value containing data creation. The student is able to capitalise on knowledge in the execution of organisation's daily SCM related processes.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped class sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Assigned tasks, report, exam, and participation will be evaluated.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2022 - 06.03.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Knowledge gained from the course can be applied to various roles along the supply chain's functions.

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Multiple global case studies will be used in the course

  Students use of time and load

  Students are expected to:
  - Attend sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and exam
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Themes for the course:
  - Supply chain management- the big picture
  - Service supply chains, strategy and processes
  - Logistics
  - Humanitarian supply chain management and logistics
  - Lean, JIT
  - Risks and risk management

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in supply chain management. The student has basic understanding of logistics in general and how it is connected to organisation's most common processes. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations regarding SCM. The student demonstrates basic skills by submitting required tasks and assignments during the course.

  Good

  The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in (emergency) supply chain. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant working life SCM related situations. The student contributes according to teacher's expectations to tasks and assignments during the course.

  Excellent

  The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in (emergency) supply chain. The student has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course. The student is also able to collect information from various nodes of SC and use the extracted information in SC planning, development and management, while streamlining it with proper managerial SCM-tools. The student can also use the acquired information as a basis for new, added value containing data creation. The student is able to capitalise on knowledge in the execution of organisation's daily SCM related processes.

•   Introduction to research methods and final thesis 3B00FT19-3001 01.08.2021-31.12.2021  2 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This online course introduces the practical issues involved in the final thesis process. The course concentrates on giving the students necessary information and competences to begin the final thesis process. This free-choice course should be completed before the student starts the writing process under the guidance of an assigned supervisor.
  
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  Describe the different forms of final thesis as well as the principles of thesis assessment in TAMK.
  Use the guides and instructions helping and regulating the final thesis process.
  Apply the basic research approaches applicable in BBA theses.
  Write a topic analysis with an appropriate form of thesis, literature review and frame of reference.
  Manage his/her final thesis process.

  Course contents

  What does the concept of applied research mean?
  What are the main research methods for applied research?
  How does the final thesis process go in practice?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass:
  
  The student can explain the concept of applied research, understands the objectivity of a research and is able to justify the basic principles of a good research. He/she can apply a suitable quantitative or qualitative approach, including a variation of data collection methods, in his/her own thesis process. The student can give constructive feedback.
  
  
  
  Fail:
  
  The student fails to recognize the principles of an applied research and cannot define any valid research question nor research objectives on his/her own field. He/she cannot manage the assigned tasks even under supervision and his/her interaction skills are not satisfactory.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  See Moodle course

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online course with essay tasks

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Essay writing

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  01.09.2021 - 15.12.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala, Tuomo Soini

  Further information for students

  This course is highly recommended to be conducted before starting the thesis process.
  Check the dead lines for tasks in Moodle.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  Pass/Fail

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Training and labour cooperation

  -

  Exam schedule

  No exam

  International connections

  -

  Students use of time and load

  Autumn semester 2021 (Check task dead lines in Moodle course!)

  Content periodicity

  Autumn semester 2021 (Check task dead lines in Moodle course!)

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Approved essays according to task descriptions using academic writing with references

•   Introduction to research methods and final thesis 3B00FT19-3002 01.01.2022-31.12.2022  2 cr  (20IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This online course introduces the practical issues involved in the final thesis process. The course concentrates on giving the students necessary information and competences to begin the final thesis process. This free-choice course should be completed before the student starts the writing process under the guidance of an assigned supervisor.
  
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  Describe the different forms of final thesis as well as the principles of thesis assessment in TAMK.
  Use the guides and instructions helping and regulating the final thesis process.
  Apply the basic research approaches applicable in BBA theses.
  Write a topic analysis with an appropriate form of thesis, literature review and frame of reference.
  Manage his/her final thesis process.

  Course contents

  What does the concept of applied research mean?
  What are the main research methods for applied research?
  How does the final thesis process go in practice?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass:
  
  The student can explain the concept of applied research, understands the objectivity of a research and is able to justify the basic principles of a good research. He/she can apply a suitable quantitative or qualitative approach, including a variation of data collection methods, in his/her own thesis process. The student can give constructive feedback.
  
  
  
  Fail:
  
  The student fails to recognize the principles of an applied research and cannot define any valid research question nor research objectives on his/her own field. He/she cannot manage the assigned tasks even under supervision and his/her interaction skills are not satisfactory.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sari Matala

  Recommended or required reading

  See Moodle course

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online course with essay tasks

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Essay writing

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.01.2022 - 31.12.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 30.11.2022

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Matala, Tuomo Soini

  Further information for students

  This course is highly recommended to be conducted before starting the thesis process.
  Check the dead lines for tasks in Moodle.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  2 cr

  Evaluation scale

  Pass/Fail

  Completion alternatives

  None

  Training and labour cooperation

  -

  Exam schedule

  No exam

  International connections

  -

  Students use of time and load

  Spring semester 2022 (Check task dead lines in Moodle course!)

  Content periodicity

  Spring semester 2022 (Check task dead lines in Moodle course!)

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Approved essays according to task descriptions using academic writing with references

•   Liikeviestintä 3B00DW81-3002 01.09.2021-13.10.2021  2 cr  (20IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Kurssi on tarkoitettu IB:n suomenkielisille opiskelijoille. Kurssilla perehdytään asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin ja harjoitellaan kirjoittamaan työ- ja liike-elämän kirjallisia viestejä, kuten liikekirjeitä ja muistioita. Kurssilla kerrataan ja harjoitellaan myös suomen kielen oikeinkirjoitusta.
  
  Kurssin suoritettuaan, opiskelija:
  
  Osoittaa perehtyneisyyttä asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin.
  Osaa käyttää ja soveltaa asiakirjastandardia alansa tyypillisissä kirjoitteissa.
  Osaa viestiä asiatyylisesti ja vakuuttavasti ottaen huomioon vastaanottajan, tilanteen ja alan käytänteet.
  Ymmärtää oikeakielisyyden merkityksen osana viestinnällistä ammattitaitoaan ja yrityksen imagoa.
  Osaa arvioida ja kehittää viestintäosaamistaan.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Mitkä ovat asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteet?
  Millainen on asiakirjastandardin rakenne ja mitä hyötyä sen hallitsemisesta on?
  Miten laaditaan työ- ja liike-elämän yleisimmät kirjoitteet?
  Mikä on kielenhuollon merkitys työelämässä?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can write business documents and messages according to given instructions and examples. He/she communicates understandably in different situations of his/her own field. The student is able to make good use of the means of communication.

  Good

  The student communicates fluently, understandably and interestingly in different situations of business life. He/she takes the receiver and situation into account in his/her communication. The student can interpret receiver’s action and respond to it by building collaboration e.g. in customer service situations.

  Excellent

  The student communicates in different situations of business life creatively and with great expertise. He/she is able to use the means of communication in many different ways and is able to influence by using language. The student can adjust his/her communication according to the receiver, situation, circumstances (e.g. online communication) and feedback. He/she takes his/her organisation’s values and visions into account in his/her communication.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Mari Touronen

  Recommended or required reading

  Verkkomateriaali Moodlessa. (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Etäopetus. Opetuskeskustelut, käytännön harjoitukset sekä kirjalliset ja suulliset tehtävät. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Opintojakson arvosana muodostuu kahdesta arvioitavasta tehtävästä. Saadakseen kurssista arvosanan opiskelijan tulee lisäksi tehdä vaaditut kotitehtävät sekä osallistua opetukseen. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.09.2021 - 13.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  Teacher(s)

  Mari Touronen

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Exam schedule

  Opintojaksosta ei järjestetä tenttiä, vaan arvosana muodostuu annettujen tehtävien arvioinneista. (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Opetusta yhteensä 14 h sijoittuen 1. periodiin. Kotitehtäviä opetuskertojen välillä ja kaksi laajempaa arvioitavaa tehtävää. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can write business documents and messages according to given instructions and examples. He/she communicates understandably in different situations of his/her own field. The student is able to make good use of the means of communication.

  Good

  The student communicates fluently, understandably and interestingly in different situations of business life. He/she takes the receiver and situation into account in his/her communication. The student can interpret receiver’s action and respond to it by building collaboration e.g. in customer service situations.

  Excellent

  The student communicates in different situations of business life creatively and with great expertise. He/she is able to use the means of communication in many different ways and is able to influence by using language. The student can adjust his/her communication according to the receiver, situation, circumstances (e.g. online communication) and feedback. He/she takes his/her organisation’s values and visions into account in his/her communication.

•   Literature Essays 3B00DX03-3001 01.08.2021-31.12.2021  2 cr  (19IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The study of literature is distinct because it requires the perspective and the skills of critical reading and analyzing. The literature essay requires personal interpretation and clear expression of ideas.
  
  The student will independently familiarise himself/herself with literature in his/her interest fields (for example entrepreneurship, management, communality, innovation or marketing) and write an essay on the book.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  Critically read and analyse literature
  Formulate a coherent summary from the literature (argument, essay)
  Build own interpretations from literature
  Act ethically when citing or referring to text written by another author

  Course contents

  What are the main topics and central concerns of the literature review?
  What are the critical points of the topic?
  How to present a reasoned argument?
  How to present a coherent essay about the topic?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Pass – (S)
  
  The student is able to explain the core concepts discussed in a certain book using a consistent and personal approach. He/she has proper referencing and summarizing skills. He/she can explain the main points of an article or a piece of work in one's own words and convey the relevant information. He/she is able to reflect on his/her experiences from working life and learnings from other source materials. He/she is able to compare his/her knowledge to the things written in the book. He/she takes responsibility of his/her own learning.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Matti Karlsson

  Recommended or required reading

  You should choose the books on which you base your essay from the List of Literature by Johannes Partanen (Jyväskylä TeamAcademy). The name of the book collected by Mr Johannes Partanen is called "Tiimiyrittäjän ja tiimivalmentajan parhaat kirjat, Valintaopas 2016" (you can also use versions from earlier or later years). Even though the name of the book is in Finnish, you can find a lot of suggested literature in English in it.
  The books in the List of Literature have been given one to three book points according to how demanding they are. Three (3) book points equals one (1) credit point. The List of Literature covers topics such as Leadership, Marketing, Innovation, Community Building, Learning, and Personal Development. International Business Students can include a maximum of five points of Literature Essays in their Individual Study Plan.
  You can borrow the List of Literature by Johannes Partanen (Jyväskylä TeamAcademy), "Tiimiyrittäjän ja tiimivalmentajan parhaat kirjat, valintaopas 2016" in TAMK Library. There is also one copy of it for review in the TAMK Reference Library.
  To get 1 credit point, the book(s) you have read must be worth three (3) book points.
  You can also suggest a book outside of the List of Literature. The book can, however, not be one of your International Business course books.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The student will independently familiarise himself/herself with literature in his/her interest fields (for example entrepreneurship, management, communality, innovation or marketing) and write an essay on the book.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  A Literature Essay must not be a summary of a book, but in stead in your essay you will need to compare the contents of the book with, or reflect on, your experiences from working life. It is more important to focus on the contents, in stead of the length, of the essay. You need to pay attention to the true findings that you gain during the reading. The essay must, however, meet the minimum requirement of two pages + the Coverpage (see the writing guidelines below).
  The essay has to have a Coverpage, where you need to identify:
  - your name
  - student number
  - the name of the book
  - the number of book points listed in the List of Literature (by Mr. Johannes Partanen)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  01.08.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  02.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  19IB

  Seats

  15 - 25

  Teacher(s)

  Matti Karlsson

  Further information for students

  Literature Essay refers to a possibility to cover 1 - 2 credit points missing form your degree by reading literature on a topic that is important for your Bachelor's Thesis, or for your current working life situation to improve your skills in a certain field of business. You will report your learning in essay form by reflecting your real-life experiences with the ideas presented in literature and articles.

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  Pass/Fail

  Students use of time and load

  The student will agree the schedule and litterature with the teacher.
  1 credit = 27 h
  2 credits = 54 h

  Content periodicity

  The process is the following
  1. Select litterature from the list and agree the schedule and litterature with the teacher
  2. Critically read and analyse literature
  3. Formulate a coherent summary from the literature (argument, essay)

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  Typical to passed essee
  The essay is done according to the above mentioned criteria and the student displays good level of expertise with the following skills
  - Critically read and analyse literature
  - Formulate a coherent summary from the literature (argument, essay)
  - Build own interpretations from literature
  - Act ethically when citing or referring to text written by another author
  
  Typical to failed essee
  The essay fails to meet any of the above mentioned criteria.

•   Managing Multicultural Organizations 3B00DW41-3003 29.10.2021-17.12.2021  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Culture is an integral part of everyday organizational life. Understanding culture facilitates organizational success in national- as well as international market. The course is designed to deal with culture and its impact in managing/leading organization made up of people from diverse cultural background.
  
  
  After completing of the course, students will be able to:
  
  Know culture from different points of view prioritizing the field of management and organization.
  
  Lead multicultural workforce
  
  Build work team/group with people from different cultural background
  
  Deal with cultural differences effectively
  
  Identify culture lenient motivational strategy
  
  Manage cultural tension by engaging empathetic approach
  
  Negotiate globally

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  First year BBA studies or equivalent studies for the exchange students

  Course contents

  What is culture?
  
  What is family-, national-, organizational- and business culture?
  
  What are the roots of culture?
  
  How culture influences management and the functioning of an organization?
  
  How to deal with cultural challenges in forming group/team and leading people with diverse cultural background?
  
  What are the crucial issues to remember while negotiating internationally?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can define culture and recognises cultural differences. He/she is aware of the course load and able to do routine tasks. The student can give and receive feedback and can do project work in a group. He/she considers and assesses things from his/her viewpoints. The student can work in a group. He/she judges things mainly from his/her own perspective.

  Good

  The student compares culture and explains its impact on different social entities. He/she helps to apply cultural approach in leading a multicultural workforce. The student as a resource person assists in solving problems in leading a multicultural workforce or building a multicultural team. He/she helps making a plan for dealing with cultural differences effectively. He/she considers and assesses issues from multicultural perspectives and can engage in negotiation with counterparts from another culture. The student becomes a responsible member of a diverse group.

  Excellent

  The student understands culture from multiple perspectives and analyses its impact on different social entities including business organisations. The student as a resource person acts independently or as part of a group in leading a multicultural workforce or building a multicultural team. He/she assists in finding solutions to team in dealing with cultural differences effectively. He/she actively engages himself/herself in the work group in finding solutions to problems at hand or adopting policy regarding a culture lenient motivational plan. Moreover, the student can play a flexible role in multicultural negotiation context.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Cultures and organizations : software of the mind : intercultural cooperation and its importance for survival, Hofstede, Geert, 2010 (suggested chapters)
  
  The Culture Map: Decoding how people think, lead, and get things done across cultures. Erin Meyer (suggested chapters)
  +
  Lecture handouts

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online teaching|study conversation|individual task|project|presentation

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Project: 30%
  Presentation: 10%
  Presentation diary: 10%
  Individual task: 50%

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  29.10.2021 - 17.12.2021

  Registration

  02.07.2021 - 15.10.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Elena Grigorova, Shaidul Kazi

  Further information for students

  Online lessons are very important from the learning point of view

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  5 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Talk to the course teacher

  Training and labour cooperation

  Possible & welcome

  Exam schedule

  No test but project, individual task & presentation

  International connections

  Open

  Students use of time and load

  Total time: 27x5 = 135 hours
  Contact lesson 7: 21 hours
  Project: 25 hours
  Reading: 29 hours
  Individual task & article note: 30 hours
  Pre-assignment & online activity: 30 hours

  Content periodicity

  29.10.2021 14.00 - 17.00 : The concept of culture. What is family-, national-, organizational- and business culture?
  
  05.11.2021 14.00 - 17.00: What are the roots of culture? How culture influences management and the functioning of an organization?
  
  12.11.2021 14.00 - 17.00: Reflection of last two lessons.
  
  26.11.2021 14.00 - 17.00: How to deal with cultural challenges in forming group/team and leading people with diverse cultural background?
  
  03.12.2021 14.00 - 17.00: What are the crucial issues to remember while negotiating internationally?
  
  10.12.2021 14.00 - 17.00: Project presentation
  
  17.12.2021 14.00 - 17.00 : Feedback, reflection & way forward

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Unable to attend to at least 3 lessons & not done the course project

  Satisfactory

  The student can define culture and recognises cultural differences. He/she is aware of the course load and able to do routine tasks. The student can give and receive feedback and can do project work in a group. He/she considers and assesses things from his/her viewpoints. The student can work in a group. He/she judges things mainly from his/her own perspective.

  Good

  The student compares culture and explains its impact on different social entities. He/she helps to apply cultural approach in leading a multicultural workforce. The student as a resource person assists in solving problems in leading a multicultural workforce or building a multicultural team. He/she helps making a plan for dealing with cultural differences effectively. He/she considers and assesses issues from multicultural perspectives and can engage in negotiation with counterparts from another culture. The student becomes a responsible member of a diverse group.

  Excellent

  The student understands culture from multiple perspectives and analyses its impact on different social entities including business organisations. The student as a resource person acts independently or as part of a group in leading a multicultural workforce or building a multicultural team. He/she assists in finding solutions to team in dealing with cultural differences effectively. He/she actively engages himself/herself in the work group in finding solutions to problems at hand or adopting policy regarding a culture lenient motivational plan. Moreover, the student can play a flexible role in multicultural negotiation context.

•   Marketing in the Digital World 3B00DW59-3003 07.03.2022-12.04.2022  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  A minority of companies still rate their digital communications or customer communications at an advanced level. Instead they are still in the phase of transformation and development of their digital marketing capabilities. This course is not only about digital marketing – it is about marketing in a digital world. It will give the students skills in planning and executing digital marketing. The key question is: how can companies, both BtoC and BtoB, benefit from digitalizing their marketing operations.
  
  The course consists of theory lectures and weekly exercises where some of the digital marketing tools are used in practice.
  
  After completing the course the students will be able to
  • describe and explain the various forms of digital marketing and
  social media
  • design a digital marketing roadmap for a company
  • use the tools of social media in business to establish a social
  media marketing campaing
  • create basic web pages, a blog or an online shop

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing or equivalent

  Course contents

  What is digital marketing?
  What are the opportunities and threats of digital marketing?
  What are the digital marketing media and tools?
  How can a company enter the digital world in a structured and planned way?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has introductory knowledge of digital marketing practices but lacks an active role in creating and publishing content for the purpose. In a team his/her role is merely passive and he/she requires help from others to cope with his/her own tasks.

  Good

  The student has basic knowledge of digital marketing and is able to independently take responsibility of his/her own learning as well as support other team members. He/she is an active contributor to the team, is able to understand and use social media channels for digital marketing and can provide good digital content to engage customers.

  Excellent

  The student has advanced knowledge of digital marketing tools, is independent, takes full responsibility of his/her own learning and helps other team members to succeed. He/she understands well the dynamics of social media channels in marketing and is able to create attractive digital content to engage existing customers and attract new ones.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles
  - Case studies
  - Videos
  - Assigned E-books

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will consist of live lessons on campus, individual assignments, team work, team presentations and an internal Instagram project. Teams will work on practical cases provided by external businesses in the areas of social media marketing plans and strategies, website assistance, etc. Internal Instagram project will serve as a tool to practce lessons learned (content creation, understanding the platform from a marketing perspective etc.).

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The course passing criteria consists of successful individual tasks and passed team work.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 12.04.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Cooperation with external businesses

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  Some of the teams may have cases from abroad.

  Students use of time and load

  The course will be intensive and carried out in one and half months calendar time. Students should be prepared for even load throughout the course.

  Content periodicity

  Contact days and internal project will discuss topical digital marketing areas. External customer project will run parallel.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student fails to pass most of the individual assignments and participates in team more as a follower than as an active contributor.

  Satisfactory

  The student has introductory knowledge of digital marketing practices, but lacks still active own role in creating and publishing content for the purpose. In a team his/her role is still merely passive and he/she requires help from others to cope with own tasks

  Good

  The student has basic knowledge of digital marketing and is able to independently take responsibility of his/her own learning and even support other team members. He/she is an active contributor in team, is able to understand and use social media channels for digital marketing and can provide good digital content to engage customers.

  Excellent

  The student has advanced knowledge of digital marketing tools, is independent, takes full responsibility of his/her own learning and helps other team members to succeed, too. He/she understands well the dynamics of social media channels in marketing and is able to create attractive digital content to engage customers and to get new customers.

•   Marketing in the Digital World 3B00DW59-3004 08.03.2022-12.04.2022  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  A minority of companies still rate their digital communications or customer communications at an advanced level. Instead they are still in the phase of transformation and development of their digital marketing capabilities. This course is not only about digital marketing – it is about marketing in a digital world. It will give the students skills in planning and executing digital marketing. The key question is: how can companies, both BtoC and BtoB, benefit from digitalizing their marketing operations.
  
  The course consists of theory lectures and weekly exercises where some of the digital marketing tools are used in practice.
  
  After completing the course the students will be able to
  • describe and explain the various forms of digital marketing and
  social media
  • design a digital marketing roadmap for a company
  • use the tools of social media in business to establish a social
  media marketing campaing
  • create basic web pages, a blog or an online shop

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  Introduction to Marketing or equivalent

  Course contents

  What is digital marketing?
  What are the opportunities and threats of digital marketing?
  What are the digital marketing media and tools?
  How can a company enter the digital world in a structured and planned way?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student has introductory knowledge of digital marketing practices but lacks an active role in creating and publishing content for the purpose. In a team his/her role is merely passive and he/she requires help from others to cope with his/her own tasks.

  Good

  The student has basic knowledge of digital marketing and is able to independently take responsibility of his/her own learning as well as support other team members. He/she is an active contributor to the team, is able to understand and use social media channels for digital marketing and can provide good digital content to engage customers.

  Excellent

  The student has advanced knowledge of digital marketing tools, is independent, takes full responsibility of his/her own learning and helps other team members to succeed. He/she understands well the dynamics of social media channels in marketing and is able to create attractive digital content to engage existing customers and attract new ones.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Articles
  - Case studies
  - Videos
  - Assigned E-books

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  The course will consist of live lessons on campus, individual assignments, team work, team presentations and an internal Instagram project. Teams will work on practical cases provided by external businesses in the areas of social media marketing plans and strategies, website assistance, etc. Internal Instagram project will serve as a tool to practce lessons learned (content creation, understanding the platform from a marketing perspective etc.).

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The course passing criteria consists of successful individual tasks and passed team work.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2022 - 12.04.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Cooperation with external businesses

  Exam schedule

  N/A

  International connections

  Some of the teams may have cases from abroad.

  Students use of time and load

  The course will be intensive and carried out in one and half months calendar time. Students should be prepared for even load throughout the course.

  Content periodicity

  Contact days and internal project will discuss topical digital marketing areas. External customer project will run parallel.

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student fails to pass most of the individual assignments and participates in team more as a follower than as an active contributor.

  Satisfactory

  The student has introductory knowledge of digital marketing practices, but lacks still active own role in creating and publishing content for the purpose. In a team his/her role is still merely passive and he/she requires help from others to cope with own tasks

  Good

  The student has basic knowledge of digital marketing and is able to independently take responsibility of his/her own learning and even support other team members. He/she is an active contributor in team, is able to understand and use social media channels for digital marketing and can provide good digital content to engage customers.

  Excellent

  The student has advanced knowledge of digital marketing tools, is independent, takes full responsibility of his/her own learning and helps other team members to succeed, too. He/she understands well the dynamics of social media channels in marketing and is able to create attractive digital content to engage customers and to get new customers.

•   Mathematics of Finance 3B00DV93-3006 04.11.2021-14.12.2021  2 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This straightforward exercise based course provides the students with information and hands-on skills of selected fundamental parts of business mathematics.
  
  The time value of money theory forms the foundation of the course. The predetermined main objectives for the students are to learn to apply the theory, solve problems and communicate the problems, their solutions as well as the achieved new understanding effectively.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Identify opportunities for mathematical problem solving involved with the time value of money concept and theory.
  • Find out the present and future values of invested money in different cases of compounding.
  • Compare interest rates, returns on investments and cash flows utilizing the effective rate, present value and net present value concepts.
  • Find out the present and future value as well as the periodic payment of an ordinary annuity.
  • Prepare simple loan amortization schedules and calculate amortizations in MS Excel.
  • Communicate mathematical problems, their solutions and interpretations briefly and informatively.

  Course contents

  • What are the simple interest, growth percentage and sum of sequence all about?
  • How are various compound interest and effective rate calculations solved?
  • How are the present value and net present value (NPV) determined?
  • What different types of annuities are there, and how are the periodic payment and the present and future values of an ordinary annuity determined?
  • How can loan amortization schedules be prepared and loans become amortized?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance. The student can solve basic level compound interest and present value problems. The student can take responsibility for any of his individual duties in routine mathematics of finance activities and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of explaining the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance and applying them in cases of reasonable difficulty. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve compound interest, present value and annuity exercises and problems as well as interpret the answers for the benefit of business projects and activities. His/her courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse mathematics of business exercises and work on related business cases
  
  individually. The student is able to choose approaches and construct equations and formulas applying the assigned mathematics of finance theory skillfully. The student can produce analyses and correct solutions to compound interest, present value and annuity problems as well as interpret the answers profoundly for the benefit of business projects and activities. The student’s courses of action are very well justified, and he/she makes noticeable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly in a committed manner.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Access to and hints about necessary theory, exercises, and other learning material are there in Moodle.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Instructor's brief introductions of the themes, theories, methods and formulas. Mathematical problem solving both under supervision in the class and individually and/or as pairwork between the classes. Model answers and discussion based on them finish each main theme of the course.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The overall course performance is evaluated and graded using:
  - a 20% weight on performing exercises acceptably during the course
  - a 20% weight on student's other overall activity, incl. sharing solutions and other mathematics of finance information with fellow students, as well as contribution to the common learning sessions and discussions
  - a 60% weight on the exam.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  04.11.2021 - 14.12.2021

  Registration

  13.09.2021 - 31.10.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  20 - 50

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács

  Further information for students

  Mr Adrián Somlósi-Kovács
  adrian.somlosi-kovacs@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Exam schedule

  The course includes a small open-book exam.
  Retake exams according to TAMK rules (e.g., in January).

  Students use of time and load

  The student's workload is max. 52-54h, in Oct-Dec 2021.

  Content periodicity

  (See the Contents and Objectives of the Course categories.)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has not solved all the required exercises. Or the student has many incorrect answers and/or is not able to show his/her understanding of the required course contents.
  Or, student has not passed the exam.

  Satisfactory

  Student has many incorrect answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions, anyway, mostly prove that he/she has, anyway, mostly understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents.
  The student has passed the exam.

  Good

  Student has mostly correct answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions prove that he/she has also understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents. Student's proven skills of also communicating and sharing his/her knowledge of the course contents during the course help in achieving the very good grade of 4, instead of the good 3.
  The student has passed the exam with, at least, a strong satisfactory performance.

  Excellent

  Student has in practice only correct answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions prove that he/she has also understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents very well. Student's highly desired habit of also communicating and sharing his/her knowledge of the course contents together with the other course participants is an additional big plus in his/her also otherwise excellent performance.
  The student has passed the exam with, at least, a very good grade of 4.

•   Mathematics of Finance 3B00DV93-3007 05.11.2021-14.12.2021  2 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This straightforward exercise based course provides the students with information and hands-on skills of selected fundamental parts of business mathematics.
  
  The time value of money theory forms the foundation of the course. The predetermined main objectives for the students are to learn to apply the theory, solve problems and communicate the problems, their solutions as well as the achieved new understanding effectively.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Identify opportunities for mathematical problem solving involved with the time value of money concept and theory.
  • Find out the present and future values of invested money in different cases of compounding.
  • Compare interest rates, returns on investments and cash flows utilizing the effective rate, present value and net present value concepts.
  • Find out the present and future value as well as the periodic payment of an ordinary annuity.
  • Prepare simple loan amortization schedules and calculate amortizations in MS Excel.
  • Communicate mathematical problems, their solutions and interpretations briefly and informatively.

  Course contents

  • What are the simple interest, growth percentage and sum of sequence all about?
  • How are various compound interest and effective rate calculations solved?
  • How are the present value and net present value (NPV) determined?
  • What different types of annuities are there, and how are the periodic payment and the present and future values of an ordinary annuity determined?
  • How can loan amortization schedules be prepared and loans become amortized?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance. The student can solve basic level compound interest and present value problems. The student can take responsibility for any of his individual duties in routine mathematics of finance activities and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of explaining the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance and applying them in cases of reasonable difficulty. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve compound interest, present value and annuity exercises and problems as well as interpret the answers for the benefit of business projects and activities. His/her courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse mathematics of business exercises and work on related business cases
  
  individually. The student is able to choose approaches and construct equations and formulas applying the assigned mathematics of finance theory skillfully. The student can produce analyses and correct solutions to compound interest, present value and annuity problems as well as interpret the answers profoundly for the benefit of business projects and activities. The student’s courses of action are very well justified, and he/she makes noticeable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly in a committed manner.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  Access to and hints about necessary theory, exercises, and other learning material are there in Moodle.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Instructor's brief introductions of the themes, theories, methods and formulas. Mathematical problem solving both under supervision in the class and individually and/or as pairwork between the classes. Model answers and discussion based on them finish each main theme of the course.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The overall course performance is evaluated and graded using:
  - a 20% weight on performing exercises acceptably during the course
  - a 20% weight on student's other overall activity, incl. sharing solutions and other mathematics of finance information with fellow students, as well as contribution to the common learning sessions and discussions
  - a 60% weight on the exam.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  05.11.2021 - 14.12.2021

  Registration

  13.09.2021 - 31.10.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  20 - 50

  Teacher(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács

  Further information for students

  Mr Adrián Somlósi-Kovács
  adrian.somlosi-kovacs@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Exam schedule

  The course includes a small open-book exam.
  Retake exams according to TAMK rules (e.g., in January).

  Students use of time and load

  The student's workload is max. 52-54h, in Oct-Dec 2021.

  Content periodicity

  (See the Contents and Objectives of the Course categories.)

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Student has not solved all the required exercises. Or the student has many incorrect answers and/or is not able to show his/her understanding of the required course contents.
  Or, student has not passed the exam.

  Satisfactory

  Student has many incorrect answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions, anyway, mostly prove that he/she has, anyway, mostly understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents.
  The student has passed the exam.

  Good

  Student has mostly correct answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions prove that he/she has also understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents. Student's proven skills of also communicating and sharing his/her knowledge of the course contents during the course help in achieving the very good grade of 4, instead of the good 3.
  The student has passed the exam with, at least, a strong satisfactory performance.

  Excellent

  Student has in practice only correct answers as end results of his/her calculations. His/her solutions prove that he/she has also understood the theories, methods and practices of the course contents very well. Student's highly desired habit of also communicating and sharing his/her knowledge of the course contents together with the other course participants is an additional big plus in his/her also otherwise excellent performance.
  The student has passed the exam with, at least, a very good grade of 4.

•   Modern Leadership Skills 3B00DW43-3004 31.08.2021-30.10.2021  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  The course is focused on contemporary leadership theories, practices and skills that are needed to lead oneself and others ethically and effectively in a fast changing business environment.
  
  After completing of the course, students will be able to:
  1) define the role and responsibilities of a manager and leader in different organisations
  2) understand their individual life motives that impact their leadership behaviour
  3) create strategies for motivating and leading others in different situations
  4) apply some essential leadership theories and practices in a fast changing environment
  5) help other succeed by using some coaching techniques

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  First year BBA studies

  Course contents

  - Motivation theories and 16 life motives
  - Leading yourself & stress management
  - Modern leadership theories, practices and styles
  - Change management
  - Coaching skills

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student defines the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she has a vague knowledge of his/her own individual life motives and superficial understanding about motivating and leading others. With the help of others, he/she can solve simple people-related problems using some of the leadership theories and practices. The student is able to apply some very basic coaching skills to certain extent. He/she can give feedback but mainly considers and assesses things from his/her own point of view without being able to assess his/her own behaviour critically or showing strong empathy towards others.

  Good

  The student explains the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she identifies some of his/her individual life motives and is able to draw conclusions to his/her actions based on the information. The student applies usual strategies for motivating and leading others. He/she can solve some people-related problems with the help of the most common leadership theories and practices. The student is able to apply some coaching skills but still needs a lot of practice to help others develop better. He/she can give feedback actively and constructively but is not very well able to assess his/her own leadership behaviour critically.

  Excellent

  The student understands the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she analyses his/her own actions and behaviours with the help of his/her individual life motives. The student creates new strategies for motivating and leading others. He/she combines leadership theories and practices for solving challenging people-related cases. The student is able to apply some coaching skills in a professional manner. He/she uses feedback systematically to help others develop and is able to assess his/her own leadership behaviour critically.

  Further information

  Main learning methods are practical exercises and skills training with other students. Presence in lectures is required.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sven Rassl

  Recommended or required reading

  Kouzes and Posner - The Leadership Challenge
  Cameron and Green - Making Sense of Change Management
  Articles and other resources as given during the lectures

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Interactive lectures
  Reading
  Exercises
  Group exam
  Writing "My Leadership Handbook"

  Assessment methods and criteria

  1) Open book group exam "Challenging leadership cases" - Grading: 0-5
  The group exam consists of several realistic cases where the students can apply their knowledge about different aspects of leadership. The cases will be solved in small teams that are created in the beginning of the course.
  2) Individual "My Leadership Handbook" - Grading: 0-5
  The handbook is good (3) if
  • Lectures and discussions are clearly utilized
  • Three of the suggested sources have been used
  • The topics have been reflected through the person's own life and/or work experiences
  • Peer group feedback has been used for the final version of the Handbook¨
  • References have been used and marked correctly

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  31.08.2021 - 30.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Toni Lehtimäki, Sven Rassl

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Training and labour cooperation

  This course will build on the students' current and previous practical leadership experiences.

  Exam schedule

  08.10.2021 08.00 - 11.00

  International connections

  International cases will be used.

  Students use of time and load

  135 hours, 5 cr, consisting of about 40 hours of face-to-face lectures and 95 hours of individual and group work

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has not participated in the group exam or has not submitted a complete "My Leadership Handbook".

  Satisfactory

  The student can describe the role and the responsibilities of a line manager. The student remembers some leadership practices and change models and is able to mention them in the group exam. The student analyses the leadership cases, including the motivation factors, but the analysis stays on a superficial level. Suggestions are given for improving the leadership situations but they remain quite shallow and simple. The student has participated in the mandatory lectures but the reflection in the Handbook about the topics shows only superficial understanding of the course topics. The student participates in the team tasks but does not contribute very positively to the team's exam outcome as evaluated by the other team members.

  Good

  The student can apply the different roles and the responsibilities of a line manager when solving challenging leadership cases. The student uses leadership practices and change models in a constructive and logical way in the group exam. The student analyses the leadership cases, including the motivation factors, and the analysis is quite detailed. Concrete, realistic and understandable leadership suggestions are given for improving the situation. The student has participated in all or most lectures and the reflection in the Handbook about the topics shows quite good understanding of the course topics. Main leadership theories and practices have been compared with student's own prior experiences about leadership. The student participates well team tasks and contributes positively to the team's exam outcome as evaluated by the other team members.

  Excellent

  The student can justify the different roles and the responsibilities of a line manager when solving challenging leadership cases. The student uses leadership practices and change models in a constructive and very logical way in the group exam. The student analyses the leadership cases, including the motivation factors, and the analysis is detailed. Realistic, creative and understandable leadership suggestions are given for improving the situation. The student has participated in all or most lectures and the reflection in the Handbook about the topics shows thorough understanding and critical thinking about the course topics. Main leadership theories and practices have been compared with student's own prior experiences about leadership and new interpretations and and solutions for the future have been developed. The student leads him/herself well under pressure and contributes very positively to the team's exam outcome as evaluated by the other team members.
  en
  The student can justify the different roles and the responsibilities of a line manager when solving challenging leadership cases. The student uses leadership practices and change models in a constructive and very logical way in the group exam. The student analyses the leadership cases, including the motivation factors, and the analysis is detailed. Realistic, creative and understandable leadership suggestions are given for improving the situation. The student has participated in all or most lectures and the reflection in the Handbook about the topics shows thorough understanding and critical thinking about the course topics. Main leadership theories and practices have been compared with student's own prior experiences about leadership and new interpretations and and solutions for the future have been developed. The student leads him/herself well under pressure and contributes very positively to the team's exam outcome as evaluated by the other team members.

•   Operations Management 3B00DW29-3003 08.09.2021-13.10.2021  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Operations Management (OM) is a discipline that applies to restaurants, cafe as well as to factories like Ford and Whirlpool. The techniques of OM apply throughout the world to virtualyy all productive enterprise. It doesn't matter if the application is in an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a department store, or a factory- the production of goods and services requires operations management. The course covers the basic aspects of OM including operations in services and production.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  - Manage the operations and processes in services and production
  
  - Calculate the productivity and labour-productivity
  
  - know how to design a service and product in order to minimize the inventory cost and design an optimal Supply Chain (Sustainable design )
  
  - Know the forecasting methods
  
  - Know the techniques of Material Requirement Planning

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Operations and Productivity
  
  - Forecasting
  
  - Design of goods and services
  
  - Aggregate Planning and MRP
  
  - JIT, SCORE Model and Lean Operations

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to recognise and analyse the organisation's processes and understand the basic principles of how they work together. The student understands the basic methodology of how to improve the processes' efficiency and their added value to both internal and external stakeholders. The student understands the importance of various, relevant stakeholders and the way how the information they each represent needs to be connected in order for the entire organisation to operate soundly. The student has a limited ability to plan and steer the organisation's processes.

  Good

  The student is able to map the entire organisation's processes and the way they connect and interact with each other, as both internal and external stakeholders. The student knows several relevant tools which he/she can independently apply in various operations management situations. The student knows how and from where to acquire the necessary systemic information in order to analyse, improve and manage the organisation's processes. The student is capable of adapting to changed requirements depending on which of the life-cycle stages the concerned processes are currently in. The student also understands how the processes are linked to the management supporting ERP-systems.

  Excellent

  The student is able to plan, erect and manage any of the organisation's processes and to apply relevant tools where necessary. The student also knows how to manage the entity of organisation's processes and operations effectively. The student can question any of organisation's operation and focus his/hers attention on relevant attributes in order to improve their overall performance. The student also understands the meaning of channel separation and can apply this both when summoning information and capitalising on the collected information on practical level. The student can also benchmark an organisation and its processes, detecting pertinent bottlenecks or improvement areas. The student possesses also basic managerial strategic knowledge regarding execution of operations and processes.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books (Operations Management, Slack, Chambers et al, multiple versions)
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped classroom sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Independent study and research

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.09.2021 - 13.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 08.09.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Project work / project case study

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Cases and discussion, global operational business environment

  Students use of time and load

  According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and exam
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Details given in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  Student participation has been on adequate level based on course schedule
  
  Student has the basic understanding on Operations management in general
  
  Student has demonstrated basic skills by submitting required tasks and asignments during the course

  Good

  Student's participation has been active during contact lessons and online between lessons.
  
  Student understands operative roles, tasks and challenges
  
  Student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables
  
  Student is capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

  Excellent

  Student has actively partipated and contributed to course implementation
  
  Student has professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of operational model of different organisations
  
  Student has demonstrated high skill level in operational management and created value and shared information to other partipants
  
  Student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

•   Operations Management 3B00DW29-3006 07.09.2021-12.10.2021  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Operations Management (OM) is a discipline that applies to restaurants, cafe as well as to factories like Ford and Whirlpool. The techniques of OM apply throughout the world to virtualyy all productive enterprise. It doesn't matter if the application is in an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a department store, or a factory- the production of goods and services requires operations management. The course covers the basic aspects of OM including operations in services and production.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  - Manage the operations and processes in services and production
  
  - Calculate the productivity and labour-productivity
  
  - know how to design a service and product in order to minimize the inventory cost and design an optimal Supply Chain (Sustainable design )
  
  - Know the forecasting methods
  
  - Know the techniques of Material Requirement Planning

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Operations and Productivity
  
  - Forecasting
  
  - Design of goods and services
  
  - Aggregate Planning and MRP
  
  - JIT, SCORE Model and Lean Operations

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to recognise and analyse the organisation's processes and understand the basic principles of how they work together. The student understands the basic methodology of how to improve the processes' efficiency and their added value to both internal and external stakeholders. The student understands the importance of various, relevant stakeholders and the way how the information they each represent needs to be connected in order for the entire organisation to operate soundly. The student has a limited ability to plan and steer the organisation's processes.

  Good

  The student is able to map the entire organisation's processes and the way they connect and interact with each other, as both internal and external stakeholders. The student knows several relevant tools which he/she can independently apply in various operations management situations. The student knows how and from where to acquire the necessary systemic information in order to analyse, improve and manage the organisation's processes. The student is capable of adapting to changed requirements depending on which of the life-cycle stages the concerned processes are currently in. The student also understands how the processes are linked to the management supporting ERP-systems.

  Excellent

  The student is able to plan, erect and manage any of the organisation's processes and to apply relevant tools where necessary. The student also knows how to manage the entity of organisation's processes and operations effectively. The student can question any of organisation's operation and focus his/hers attention on relevant attributes in order to improve their overall performance. The student also understands the meaning of channel separation and can apply this both when summoning information and capitalising on the collected information on practical level. The student can also benchmark an organisation and its processes, detecting pertinent bottlenecks or improvement areas. The student possesses also basic managerial strategic knowledge regarding execution of operations and processes.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books (Operations Management, Slack, Chambers et al, multiple versions)
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped classroom sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Independent study and research

  Assessment methods and criteria

  According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
  - Knowing
  - Doing
  - Being

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.09.2021 - 12.10.2021

  Registration

  09.06.2021 - 09.09.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Project work / project case study

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Cases and discussion, global operational business environment

  Students use of time and load

  According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and exam
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Details given in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  Student participation has been on adequate level based on course schedule
  
  Student has the basic understanding on Operations management in general
  
  Student has demonstrated basic skills by submitting required tasks and asignments during the course

  Good

  Student's participation has been active during contact lessons and online between lessons.
  
  Student understands operative roles, tasks and challenges
  
  Student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables
  
  Student is capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

  Excellent

  Student has actively partipated and contributed to course implementation
  
  Student has professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of operational model of different organisations
  
  Student has demonstrated high skill level in operational management and created value and shared information to other partipants
  
  Student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

•   Operations Management 3B00DW29-3009 03.01.2022-25.02.2022  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Operations Management (OM) is a discipline that applies to restaurants, cafe as well as to factories like Ford and Whirlpool. The techniques of OM apply throughout the world to virtualyy all productive enterprise. It doesn't matter if the application is in an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a department store, or a factory- the production of goods and services requires operations management. The course covers the basic aspects of OM including operations in services and production.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  - Manage the operations and processes in services and production
  
  - Calculate the productivity and labour-productivity
  
  - know how to design a service and product in order to minimize the inventory cost and design an optimal Supply Chain (Sustainable design )
  
  - Know the forecasting methods
  
  - Know the techniques of Material Requirement Planning

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Operations and Productivity
  
  - Forecasting
  
  - Design of goods and services
  
  - Aggregate Planning and MRP
  
  - JIT, SCORE Model and Lean Operations

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to recognise and analyse the organisation's processes and understand the basic principles of how they work together. The student understands the basic methodology of how to improve the processes' efficiency and their added value to both internal and external stakeholders. The student understands the importance of various, relevant stakeholders and the way how the information they each represent needs to be connected in order for the entire organisation to operate soundly. The student has a limited ability to plan and steer the organisation's processes.

  Good

  The student is able to map the entire organisation's processes and the way they connect and interact with each other, as both internal and external stakeholders. The student knows several relevant tools which he/she can independently apply in various operations management situations. The student knows how and from where to acquire the necessary systemic information in order to analyse, improve and manage the organisation's processes. The student is capable of adapting to changed requirements depending on which of the life-cycle stages the concerned processes are currently in. The student also understands how the processes are linked to the management supporting ERP-systems.

  Excellent

  The student is able to plan, erect and manage any of the organisation's processes and to apply relevant tools where necessary. The student also knows how to manage the entity of organisation's processes and operations effectively. The student can question any of organisation's operation and focus his/hers attention on relevant attributes in order to improve their overall performance. The student also understands the meaning of channel separation and can apply this both when summoning information and capitalising on the collected information on practical level. The student can also benchmark an organisation and its processes, detecting pertinent bottlenecks or improvement areas. The student possesses also basic managerial strategic knowledge regarding execution of operations and processes.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Matti Karlsson

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books (Operations Management, Slack, Chambers et al, multiple versions)
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped classroom sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Independent study and research

  Assessment methods and criteria

  There are three deliverables affecting to the grade:
  1. Collaborative project work report and presentation, weight 80%, evaluated on scale 0-5, contribution to grade 0-4
  2. Individual book essay, weight 20%, evaluated as pass/fail, contribution to grade 0-1
  
  Evaluated aspects will include knowledge, skills and behaviour.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  03.01.2022 - 25.02.2022

  Registration

  15.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Matti Karlsson

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Project work / project case study

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Cases and discussion, global operational business environment

  Students use of time and load

  According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and exam
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Details given in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has failed to achieve at least grade 1 concerning deliverable #1, i.e. project work report and presentation. In other words, deliverable #1 is mandatory, deliverables #2 and #3 are voluntary. Without deliverables #2 and #3, the grade will be between 0 and 3.

  Satisfactory

  Student participation has been on adequate level based on course schedule
  
  Student has the basic understanding on Operations management in general
  
  Student has demonstrated basic skills by submitting required tasks and asignments during the course

  Good

  Student's participation has been active during contact lessons and online between lessons.
  
  Student understands operative roles, tasks and challenges
  
  Student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables
  
  Student is capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

  Excellent

  Student has actively partipated and contributed to course implementation
  
  Student has professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of operational model of different organisations
  
  Student has demonstrated high skill level in operational management and created value and shared information to other partipants
  
  Student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

•   Operations Management 3B00DW29-3010 03.01.2022-25.02.2022  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  Operations Management (OM) is a discipline that applies to restaurants, cafe as well as to factories like Ford and Whirlpool. The techniques of OM apply throughout the world to virtualyy all productive enterprise. It doesn't matter if the application is in an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a department store, or a factory- the production of goods and services requires operations management. The course covers the basic aspects of OM including operations in services and production.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  - Manage the operations and processes in services and production
  
  - Calculate the productivity and labour-productivity
  
  - know how to design a service and product in order to minimize the inventory cost and design an optimal Supply Chain (Sustainable design )
  
  - Know the forecasting methods
  
  - Know the techniques of Material Requirement Planning

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  Operations and Productivity
  
  - Forecasting
  
  - Design of goods and services
  
  - Aggregate Planning and MRP
  
  - JIT, SCORE Model and Lean Operations

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to recognise and analyse the organisation's processes and understand the basic principles of how they work together. The student understands the basic methodology of how to improve the processes' efficiency and their added value to both internal and external stakeholders. The student understands the importance of various, relevant stakeholders and the way how the information they each represent needs to be connected in order for the entire organisation to operate soundly. The student has a limited ability to plan and steer the organisation's processes.

  Good

  The student is able to map the entire organisation's processes and the way they connect and interact with each other, as both internal and external stakeholders. The student knows several relevant tools which he/she can independently apply in various operations management situations. The student knows how and from where to acquire the necessary systemic information in order to analyse, improve and manage the organisation's processes. The student is capable of adapting to changed requirements depending on which of the life-cycle stages the concerned processes are currently in. The student also understands how the processes are linked to the management supporting ERP-systems.

  Excellent

  The student is able to plan, erect and manage any of the organisation's processes and to apply relevant tools where necessary. The student also knows how to manage the entity of organisation's processes and operations effectively. The student can question any of organisation's operation and focus his/hers attention on relevant attributes in order to improve their overall performance. The student also understands the meaning of channel separation and can apply this both when summoning information and capitalising on the collected information on practical level. The student can also benchmark an organisation and its processes, detecting pertinent bottlenecks or improvement areas. The student possesses also basic managerial strategic knowledge regarding execution of operations and processes.

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Matti Karlsson

  Recommended or required reading

  - Presentation material
  - Assigned books (Operations Management, Slack, Chambers et al, multiple versions)
  - Articles and case studies
  - Video

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  - Lectures
  - Flipped classroom sessions
  - Inquiry-based learning
  - Collaborative learning
  - Independent study and research

  Assessment methods and criteria

  There are three deliverables affecting to the grade:
  1. Collaborative project work report and presentation, weight 80%, evaluated on scale 0-5, contribution to grade 0-4
  2. Individual book essay, weight 20%, evaluated as pass/fail, contribution to grade 0-1
  
  Evaluated aspects will include knowledge, skills and behaviour.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  03.01.2022 - 25.02.2022

  Registration

  15.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Matti Karlsson

  Further information for students

  N/A

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  N/A

  Training and labour cooperation

  Project work / project case study

  Exam schedule

  Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

  International connections

  Cases and discussion, global operational business environment

  Students use of time and load

  According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
  Students are expected to:
  - Attend zoom sessions
  - Participate in group discussions and activities
  - Complete the final report and exam
  - Study materials given to them on their own time

  Content periodicity

  Details given in the first lesson

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  Student participation has been on adequate level based on course schedule
  
  Student has the basic understanding on Operations management in general
  
  Student has demonstrated basic skills by submitting required tasks and asignments during the course

  Good

  Student's participation has been active during contact lessons and online between lessons.
  
  Student understands operative roles, tasks and challenges
  
  Student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables
  
  Student is capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

  Excellent

  Student has actively partipated and contributed to course implementation
  
  Student has professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of operational model of different organisations
  
  Student has demonstrated high skill level in operational management and created value and shared information to other partipants
  
  Student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

•   Organizational Communication 3B00DW17-3005 30.08.2021-31.12.2021  3 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers various aspects of organizational communication, including theoretical background and practical communication activities. It deals with written, verbal and non-verbal communication, focusing on clarity and appropriateness in all situations.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate familiarity with theories of organizational communication.
  • Adapt their communication style according to a range of interpersonal factors, such as relative status, degree of familiarity, and cultural norms.
  • Use spoken English and non-verbal language effectively in face-to-face communication.
  • Produce written English texts which meet set norms regarding lay-out, organization, and accuracy.
  • Learn the basics of public relations

  Course contents

  • What are the essentials for effective organizational communication?
  • What are internal communications and public relations?
  • With what communities, groups and individuals do organizations need to communicate?
  • What factors affect the appropriate degree of formality and level of detail required in both face-to-face and written communication?
  • What are the different channels, communication vehicles and activities needed?
  • What discourse types and communication tools are typically used in organizational communication?
  • How to measure success in communication?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Elena Grigorova

  Recommended or required reading

  - Materials in Moodle
  - Student’s own research (enquiry based learning)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lectures, discussions, facilitation, group and individual work.
  Some tasks are linked to activities in the professional development project (virtual firms).

  Assessment methods and criteria

  - Internal Communication Scenarios - 25% (self, peer, teacher evaluation)
  - Business Documentation - 25% (self, peer, teacher evaluation)
  - Final Assessment - 30% (teacher evaluation)
  - Extension Tasks, Engagement and Course Participation - 20% (teacher evaluation)
  
  Grading rubrics will be provided for assessed tasks and will be based on the principles of authentic learning and assessment and use the SOLO framework – “Structural Observation of Learning Outcomes” (Biggs and Collis, 1982, Biggs 1999).

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  30.08.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  01.06.2021 - 01.09.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Elena Grigorova

  Further information for students

  Mandatory attendance: 80%

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not applicable.

  Training and labour cooperation

  The course is supportive of the professional development project the students are undertaking and is based on real life experience of working business and commerce.

  Exam schedule

  Details of the assessment schedule will be provided in Moodle.

  International connections

  The course will examine international organizational communication. Students will consider and reflect upon the impact and diversity of culture to organizational communications, using examples from the teacher and students' experiences.

  Students use of time and load

  - Contact lessons 39 hours (13 x 3 h)
  - Independent study 42 hours

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

•   Organizational Communication 3B00DW17-3006 30.08.2021-31.12.2021  3 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers various aspects of organizational communication, including theoretical background and practical communication activities. It deals with written, verbal and non-verbal communication, focusing on clarity and appropriateness in all situations.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Demonstrate familiarity with theories of organizational communication.
  • Adapt their communication style according to a range of interpersonal factors, such as relative status, degree of familiarity, and cultural norms.
  • Use spoken English and non-verbal language effectively in face-to-face communication.
  • Produce written English texts which meet set norms regarding lay-out, organization, and accuracy.
  • Learn the basics of public relations

  Course contents

  • What are the essentials for effective organizational communication?
  • What are internal communications and public relations?
  • With what communities, groups and individuals do organizations need to communicate?
  • What factors affect the appropriate degree of formality and level of detail required in both face-to-face and written communication?
  • What are the different channels, communication vehicles and activities needed?
  • What discourse types and communication tools are typically used in organizational communication?
  • How to measure success in communication?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Elena Grigorova

  Recommended or required reading

  - Materials in Moodle
  - Student’s own research (enquiry based learning)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lectures, discussions, facilitation, group and individual work.
  Some tasks are linked to activities in the professional development project (virtual firms).

  Assessment methods and criteria

  - Internal Communication Scenarios - 25% (self, peer, teacher evaluation)
  - Business Documentation - 25% (self, peer, teacher evaluation)
  - Final Assessment - 30% (teacher evaluation)
  - Extension Tasks, Engagement and Course Participation - 20% (teacher evaluation)
  
  Grading rubrics will be provided for assessed tasks and will be based on the principles of authentic learning and assessment and use the SOLO framework – “Structural Observation of Learning Outcomes” (Biggs and Collis, 1982, Biggs 1999).

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  30.08.2021 - 31.12.2021

  Registration

  01.06.2021 - 01.09.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Elena Grigorova

  Further information for students

  Mandatory attendance: 80%

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  Not applicable.

  Training and labour cooperation

  The course is supportive of the professional development project the students are undertaking and is based on real life experience of working business and commerce.

  Exam schedule

  Details of the assessment schedule will be provided in Moodle.

  International connections

  The course will examine international organizational communication. Students will consider and reflect upon the impact and diversity of culture to organizational communications, using examples from the teacher and students' experiences.

  Students use of time and load

  - Contact lessons 39 hours (13 x 3 h)
  - Independent study 42 hours

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

  Good

  The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

  Excellent

  The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

•   Performance Management and Control 3B00DW51-3002 12.01.2022-18.03.2022  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course offers the students a chance to enhance their knowledge and managerial skills of financial planning and control as well as performance measurement and evaluation to a professional level.
  
  The course is based on modern management accounting methods, frameworks and practices, laying a solid foundation on which continuing business studies and a serious business career in the field of accounting and finance can be built later on. The contents and learning experiences of the course are planned to be useful and generally applicable for every business professional.
  
  After completing the course, students will be able to:
  
  Prepare the major budgets of a company and participate in creation of budgeting systems.
  Analyze business performance and participate in decision-making and business planning using standard budget reports.
  Create business forecasts for the future, based on budget reports and other relevant business information.
  Calculate the value of economic value added (EVA®) measure and utilize the DuPont approach to the return on investment (ROI) measure.
  Participate in planning and implementing tailor-made strategic performance management solutions for various business cases.
  Consider and try to include the effects of latest technological innovations and human aspects in any of their later business development projects.

  Course contents

  Which budgets does a modern budgeting system – “The Master Budget” – include, and how can a tailored version be constructed?
  How can the planning and control processes of a decentralized organization be managed using budgets, reports and supporting IT tools?
  What different approaches are there for strategic performance measurement and evaluation?
  What are the roles of human considerations, e.g. gaming, intangible assets and management myopia, as part of system creation?
  How are the values of advanced measures such as economic value added (EVA®) calculated, and how can business reporting become more lively through visualization?
  How can technology help in planning and control; what kind of insights do e.g. ERP systems, business intelligence and the current strong development of digitalization, mobile services and Internet of Things (IoT) offer to companies?
  How is a strategy-bound performance management framework built and used in practice?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of financial planning and control as well as the performance measurement and evaluation theme sufficiently. He/she can take responsibility for his individual financial planning and reporting duties in routine activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student achieves the competence of applying and explaining the concepts and methods of financial planning and control as well as the performance measurement and evaluation theme in controllable situations. He/she works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve financial planning and measurement problems, and his courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various financial planning and control as well as performance measurement and evaluation tasks and problems. He/she is able to apply his extensive knowledge and skills of the subject matter creatively in problem solving, solution tracing, new experiments, and when generalising his well-justified courses of action. The student can work strongly individually and make remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Recommended or required reading

  Bhimani, A., Datar, S., Horngren, C.T. & Rajan, M. 2018. Management and Cost Accounting. 7th ed. Harlow, United Kingdom: Pearson Education. Chapters 14 and 18-21.
  ISBN: 9781292232669. EISBN: 9781292232676.
  https://andor.tuni.fi/permalink/358FIN_TAMPO/176jdvt/cdi_askewsholts_vlebooks_9781292232676
  
  In addition, student groups also perform self-driven data collection, as part of their group assignment.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Learning discussions, group assignment(s), exercises, case studies, literature, lecturing.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Student’s overall course grade is based on
  1. the evaluation criteria of this course
  2. active individual participation in the classes
  3. performing all the assigned course exercises as instructed
  4. his/her group assignment performance.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  12.01.2022 - 18.03.2022

  Registration

  24.11.2021 - 11.01.2022

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Seats

  0 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Further information for students

  Pasi Kuusijärvi, M.Sc. (Econ. & Bus. Adm.), AmO, HHJ
  Senior Lecturer, Accounting and Financial Management
  
  Tampere University of Applied Sciences (TAMK)
  Tampere, Finland
  
  pasi.kuusijarvi@tuni.fi
  Tel. +358 40 846 3052
  www.tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  No.

  Training and labour cooperation

  No, not in the winter 2022 implementation.

  Exam schedule

  No written exam.

  International connections

  Neither guest lectures nor company visits or so in the winter 2022 implementation; a truly international group of students, anyway, studying together. The implementation group also includes a lot of double-degree and exchange students.

  Students use of time and load

  Max. some 135 hours as workload; 15 hours of that as contact teaching classes.

  Content periodicity

  1. THE MASTER BUDGET
  - Case: Ho-re-ca Business
  2. STRATEGIC PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT AND EVALUATION
  - EVA
  - ROI DuPont
  - The Balanced Scorecard (BSC)
  3. GROUP ASSIGNMENT
  - Objectives and Key Results (OKR) challenging The BSC.

•   Product Costing and Financial Analysis 3B00DW09-3006 08.03.2022-28.04.2022  3 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This two-part course provides the students with cornerstone level information of both product costing and pricing as well as financial closing analysis. Relevant theoretical accounting information is used as important supporting learning material. As the most important thing, anyway, the approach and mode of operations are truly practical all through the course.
  
  The first part of the course introduces the product costing and pricing theme to the students. Key terms and concepts are defined, and the students learn to use especially their new job costing knowledge and skills by solving basic-level costing and pricing exercises. Studying the cost - volume - profit (C-V-P) analysis and the break-even analysis themes finishes the first part of the course.
  
  The second part of the course has its focus on ready-made financial closing information and financial key ratios based on that. In this section, the students are supervised to have their own little research on both financial statements of some publicly traded company and their own practice firm. In addition to that, several most commonly applied financial key ratios under categories profitability, liquidity and solvency are introduced to the students, and they read about, interpret and solve the values of them in practice.
  
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Solve basic-level product costing and pricing problems, using especially the job-costing method.
  Perform C-V-P and break-even analyses, and use the analysis results in practice.
  Participate in business planning and decision making, proving various decision makers with reliable product profitability information.
  Read and interpret financial closing information of the income statements, balance sheets and cash flow statements.
  Calculate the values of the most common profitability measures gross profit, operating profit, net profit, return on assets and return on equity.
  Evaluate the performance of companies also based on liquidity measures such as working capital, current and quick ratio as well as turnovers of A/R and inventory.
  Find out the debt and/or equity ratio of a company.
  Measure, evaluate and analyze the financial performance of a company, using a many-sided set of financial key ratios.
  Based on the analysis work done, decide on case-specific business planning issues.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What do the different numerous costing and pricing terms and concepts mean in practice?
  How is product costing and pricing implemented in practice, applying job costing?
  What other alternative costing and pricing methods are there, and when are they applicable?
  How are the C-V-P and break-even analyses performed, and how can the analysis results be used in businesses?
  What are the most meaningful and important pieces of information on the financial statements, and how can the income statement and balance sheet information be used in external decision making?
  Which measures of profitability can be identified and easily used in practice?
  What are the definitions and uses of different liquidity measures?
  How is solvency measured; is it simply given as a part of financial closing, or can it be planned?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of product costing and financial closing analysis themes sufficiently. The student can take responsibility of his/her individual product costing and financial closing analysis duties in routine activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of understanding and explaining the concepts and methods of the product costing and financial closing analysis themes, and can apply them in controllable situations. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve product-costing problems and produce financial closing analyses, and his/her courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various product costing and financial closing analysis tasks and problems. The student is able to apply his/her knowledge and skills of the subject matter creatively in data collection, analyses and calculations, problem solving, and when interpreting and sharing his/her well-justified solutions. The student can work strongly individually and make remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Recommended or required reading

  Bhimani, A., Datar, S., Horngren, C.T. & Rajan, M. 2018. Management and Cost Accounting. 7th ed. Harlow, United Kingdom: Pearson Education. Chapters 1-3, 11 and selectively also 4-5.
  ISBN: 9781292232669. EISBN: 9781292232676.
  https://andor.tuni.fi/permalink/358FIN_TAMPO/176jdvt/cdi_askewsholts_vlebooks_9781292232676
  
  https://www-kauppalehti-fi.libproxy.tuni.fi/porssi/kurssit/XHEL
  
  In addition, student groups perform their own case specific data collection, as part of their group assignment.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Learning discussions, group assignment(s), exercises, case studies, literature, lecturing.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Student’s overall course grade is based on
  1. the evaluation criteria of this course
  2. active individual participation in the classes and exercises
  3. his/her group assignment performance, including both the group's own report and action in an opposing team.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2022 - 28.04.2022

  Registration

  16.01.2022 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  0 - 37

  Teacher(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Further information for students

  Pasi Kuusijärvi, M.Sc. (Econ. & Bus. Adm.), AmO, HHJ PJ
  Senior Lecturer, Accounting and Financial Management
  
  Tampere University of Applied Sciences (TAMK)
  Tampere, Finland
  
  pasi.kuusijarvi@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  No.

  Training and labour cooperation

  No.

  Exam schedule

  No written exam.

  International connections

  There is no preplanned guest lectures or company visits on the agenda in this spring 2022 implementation.
  The truly international group of students, anyway, studies altogether - and participation in the TAMK International week during week nr. 14 / 2022 in April may be possible.

  Students use of time and load

  Max. some 80 hours as workload; 15 hours of that as contact teaching.

  Content periodicity

  Studying product costing forms the first part of the course, studying financial closing analysis the second/last part.

•   Product Costing and Financial Analysis 3B00DW09-3007 08.03.2022-27.04.2022  3 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This two-part course provides the students with cornerstone level information of both product costing and pricing as well as financial closing analysis. Relevant theoretical accounting information is used as important supporting learning material. As the most important thing, anyway, the approach and mode of operations are truly practical all through the course.
  
  The first part of the course introduces the product costing and pricing theme to the students. Key terms and concepts are defined, and the students learn to use especially their new job costing knowledge and skills by solving basic-level costing and pricing exercises. Studying the cost - volume - profit (C-V-P) analysis and the break-even analysis themes finishes the first part of the course.
  
  The second part of the course has its focus on ready-made financial closing information and financial key ratios based on that. In this section, the students are supervised to have their own little research on both financial statements of some publicly traded company and their own practice firm. In addition to that, several most commonly applied financial key ratios under categories profitability, liquidity and solvency are introduced to the students, and they read about, interpret and solve the values of them in practice.
  
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Solve basic-level product costing and pricing problems, using especially the job-costing method.
  Perform C-V-P and break-even analyses, and use the analysis results in practice.
  Participate in business planning and decision making, proving various decision makers with reliable product profitability information.
  Read and interpret financial closing information of the income statements, balance sheets and cash flow statements.
  Calculate the values of the most common profitability measures gross profit, operating profit, net profit, return on assets and return on equity.
  Evaluate the performance of companies also based on liquidity measures such as working capital, current and quick ratio as well as turnovers of A/R and inventory.
  Find out the debt and/or equity ratio of a company.
  Measure, evaluate and analyze the financial performance of a company, using a many-sided set of financial key ratios.
  Based on the analysis work done, decide on case-specific business planning issues.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What do the different numerous costing and pricing terms and concepts mean in practice?
  How is product costing and pricing implemented in practice, applying job costing?
  What other alternative costing and pricing methods are there, and when are they applicable?
  How are the C-V-P and break-even analyses performed, and how can the analysis results be used in businesses?
  What are the most meaningful and important pieces of information on the financial statements, and how can the income statement and balance sheet information be used in external decision making?
  Which measures of profitability can be identified and easily used in practice?
  What are the definitions and uses of different liquidity measures?
  How is solvency measured; is it simply given as a part of financial closing, or can it be planned?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of product costing and financial closing analysis themes sufficiently. The student can take responsibility of his/her individual product costing and financial closing analysis duties in routine activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of understanding and explaining the concepts and methods of the product costing and financial closing analysis themes, and can apply them in controllable situations. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve product-costing problems and produce financial closing analyses, and his/her courses of action are well justified.

  Excellent

  The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various product costing and financial closing analysis tasks and problems. The student is able to apply his/her knowledge and skills of the subject matter creatively in data collection, analyses and calculations, problem solving, and when interpreting and sharing his/her well-justified solutions. The student can work strongly individually and make remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Recommended or required reading

  Bhimani, A., Datar, S., Horngren, C.T. & Rajan, M. 2018. Management and Cost Accounting. 7th ed. Harlow, United Kingdom: Pearson Education. Chapters 1-3, 11 and selectively also 4-5.
  ISBN: 9781292232669. EISBN: 9781292232676.
  https://andor.tuni.fi/permalink/358FIN_TAMPO/176jdvt/cdi_askewsholts_vlebooks_9781292232676
  
  https://www-kauppalehti-fi.libproxy.tuni.fi/porssi/kurssit/XHEL
  
  In addition, student groups perform their own case specific data collection, as part of their group assignment.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Learning discussions, group assignment(s), exercises, case studies, literature, lecturing.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Student’s overall course grade is based on
  1. the evaluation criteria of this course
  2. active individual participation in the classes and exercises
  3. his/her group assignment performance, including both the group's own report and action in an opposing team.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  08.03.2022 - 27.04.2022

  Registration

  16.01.2022 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  0 - 37

  Teacher(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Further information for students

  Pasi Kuusijärvi, M.Sc. (Econ. & Bus. Adm.), AmO, HHJ PJ
  Senior Lecturer, Accounting and Financial Management
  
  Tampere University of Applied Sciences (TAMK)
  Tampere, Finland
  
  pasi.kuusijarvi@tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  No.

  Training and labour cooperation

  No.

  Exam schedule

  No written exam.

  International connections

  There is no preplanned guest lectures or company visits on the agenda in this spring 2022 implementation.
  The truly international group of students, anyway, studies altogether - and participation in the TAMK International week during week nr. 14 / 2022 in April may be possible.

  Students use of time and load

  Max. some 80 hours as workload; 15 hours of that as contact teaching.

  Content periodicity

  Studying product costing forms the first part of the course, studying financial closing analysis the second/last part.

•   Professional Development 3B00DW19-3005 30.08.2021-31.07.2022  4 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course covers essential information on studying at TAMK IB programme. Professional Development course encourages the students to adopt a professional approach to their studies, and develop working habits appropriate to working life. As a practical approach students will study in teams who will set up a virtual company. Professional Development course includes weekly team meetings with assigned coach.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Know the contents of IB programme and TAMK learning environment
  • Have a plan for completing their studies in the IB programme, taking into consideration their priorities, long-term goals, strengths and weaknesses.
  • Know what self-motivated learning is and know how to develop teamwork skills in multicultural environment
  • Know how to develop study skills, e.g. learning strategies and time management skills.
  • Know the practical training process and how to apply for a job.
  • Know how the international study exchange process works in practice.

  Course contents

  • What regulations do all TAMK students need to follow?
  • What requirements apply specifically to the International Business degree programme?
  • What skills do I need to work in multicultural teams?
  • How can I develop my study skills and manage my time better?
  • What does supervised practical training mean?
  • How do I plan my international study exchange?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to name teamwork roles and principles. The student recognises team development phases. The student can act as a team member. The student can give and receive feedback.

  Good

  The student applies teamwork principles in his/her own team behavior. The student is able to solve teamwork tasks and teamwork related problems. The student takes responsibility and commits to teamwork. The student develops his/her own teamwork skills.

  Excellent

  The student understands how effective team works in professional context. The student is able to adopt different team roles in various team tasks creatively. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively in a team. The student contributes actively to improve team’s performance and collective action.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Recommended or required reading

  The materials are to be distributed during the classes, during the fall and spring semester. Including books, articles, networking and other relevant sources.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Tutorial coaching and teaching, team working, exercises, individial working.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Grading scale is 0-5.
  The grading is based on student activity, team peer evaluation and coach evaluation.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  30.08.2021 - 31.07.2022

  Registration

  02.07.2021 - 31.08.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén, Kirjasto,informaatikko Virtuaalihenkilö, Tuomo Soini, Annikka Lepola, Sean Morga, Anu Kallionpää

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  To be defined by the teachers

  Training and labour cooperation

  There are virtual firms to be established by the students, with real business connections when applicable.

  Exam schedule

  Exams and assignments are to be informed during the classes.

  International connections

  The course is part of International Business studies, international students from various regions.

  Students use of time and load

  The course is running 4 periods, totally 4 credits. One credit per period.

  Content periodicity

  The course (Professional Development) content and themes are aligned with subject studies, based on the following periodical set up:
  Period 1:Business environment
  Period 2:Establishing a new business
  Period 3:Towards profitable business
  Period 4: International business and market development

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  Insufficient participation in team activities.

  Satisfactory

  Sufficient participation in team activities and sufficient contribution to team projects.

  Good

  Good participation in team activities and good contribution to team projects.

  Excellent

  Excellent participation in team activities and excellent contribution to team projects.

•   Professional Selling 3B00DW31-3003 26.10.2021-07.12.2021  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to
  
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment.
  • Manage a sales process both in b-to-c and b-to-b sales situations.
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process.
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in b-to-c and b-to-b settings?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other, selected countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

  Approved/Failed

  Not approved 
  
  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process. 

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be uploaded to the course Moodle page weekly.
  
  • Shared learning material in Moodle (presentations, articles, videos)
  • Library services for data collection (methods and links)
  • Models for process planning, implementation and evaluation
  • Students' own notes and remarks

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  • Lectures in the virtual classroom
  • Independent studies based on provided materials
  • Sales process simulation assignments, practiced individually and with partners

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The evaluation is based on successful completion of the following tasks and activities:
  • Weekly assignments in different forms (games, role play, reports, or other)
  • Final assessment (sales situation simulation)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  26.10.2021 - 07.12.2021

  Registration

  15.09.2021 - 14.10.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Elena Grigorova, Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  On this course students will learn different techniques for improving their professional sales skills. Students will study different approaches to sales situations and negotiations as well as gain understanding of the sales process. Subject theory runs parallel with the implementation of practical training.
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment
  • Manage a sales process both in b2c and b2b sales situations
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures
  • Understand the importance of necessary preparation work before contacting prospects
  • Fit the offering into the needs of target markets and clients
  • Evaluate, choose and use appropriate sales and negotiation techniques in various sales situations
  • Measure, analyze and improve personal sales skills

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  If a student has extensive sales experience, he/she may earn credits for this course through demonstration of competencies.
  
  Such cases should be discussed with the teachers at the beginning of the course and a formal application should be filed in the CreTa accreditation system.
  
  More information on recognition of prior learning can be found on the Intranet: https://intra.tuni.fi/en/handbook?page=2208.

  Training and labour cooperation

  Guest speakers might be visiting the virtual classes.

  Exam schedule

  There is no exam in this course.
  For more information on evaluation, please see Methods and Grounds for Evaluation.

  International connections

  A view of the assessment of European sales competition (ESC)

  Students use of time and load

  One study credit = 27 hours
  4 credit course = 108 hours
  21 hours of contact teaching
  87 hours of individual work and group exercises

  Content periodicity

  Planned content
  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in a b2c and/or b2b setting?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

•   Professional Selling 3B00DW31-3005 27.10.2021-08.12.2021  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to
  
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment.
  • Manage a sales process both in b-to-c and b-to-b sales situations.
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process.
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in b-to-c and b-to-b settings?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other, selected countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

  Approved/Failed

  Not approved 
  
  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process. 

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sean Morga

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be uploaded to the course Moodle page weekly.
  
  • Shared learning material in Moodle (presentations, articles, videos)
  • Library services for data collection (methods and links)
  • Models for process planning, implementation and evaluation
  • Students' own notes and remarks

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  • Lectures in the virtual classroom
  • Independent studies based on provided materials
  • Sales process simulation assignments, practiced individually and with partners

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The evaluation is based on successful completion of the following tasks and activities:
  • Weekly assignments in different forms (games, role play, reports, or other)
  • Final assessment (sales situation simulation)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  27.10.2021 - 08.12.2021

  Registration

  31.08.2021 - 14.10.2021

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  21KVHN2

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Elena Grigorova, Sean Morga

  Further information for students

  On this course students will learn different techniques for improving their professional sales skills. Students will study different approaches to sales situations and negotiations as well as gain understanding of the sales process. Subject theory runs parallel with the implementation of practical training.
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment
  • Manage a sales process both in b2c and b2b sales situations
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures
  • Understand the importance of necessary preparation work before contacting prospects
  • Fit the offering into the needs of target markets and clients
  • Evaluate, choose and use appropriate sales and negotiation techniques in various sales situations
  • Measure, analyze and improve personal sales skills

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  If a student has extensive sales experience, he/she may earn credits for this course through demonstration of competencies.
  
  Such cases should be discussed with the teachers at the beginning of the course and a formal application should be filed in the CreTa accreditation system.
  
  More information on recognition of prior learning can be found on the Intranet: https://intra.tuni.fi/en/handbook?page=2208.

  Training and labour cooperation

  Guest speakers might be visiting the virtual classes.

  Exam schedule

  There is no exam in this course.
  For more information on evaluation, please see Methods and Grounds for Evaluation.

  International connections

  A view of the assessment of European sales competition (ESC)

  Students use of time and load

  One study credit = 27 hours
  4 credit course = 108 hours
  21 hours of contact teaching
  87 hours of individual work and group exercises

  Content periodicity

  Planned content
  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in a b2c and/or b2b setting?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Not approved

  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

•   Professional Selling 3B00DW31-3008 07.03.2022-31.07.2022  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to
  
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment.
  • Manage a sales process both in b-to-c and b-to-b sales situations.
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process.
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in b-to-c and b-to-b settings?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other, selected countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

  Approved/Failed

  Not approved 
  
  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process. 

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Juha Ikonen

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be uploaded to the course Moodle page weekly.
  
  • Shared learning material in Moodle (presentations, articles, videos)
  • Library services for data collection (methods and links)
  • Models for process planning, implementation and evaluation
  • Students' own notes and remarks

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  • Lectures in the virtual classroom
  • Independent studies based on provided materials
  • Sales process simulation assignments, practiced individually and with partners

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The evaluation is based on successful completion of the following tasks and activities:
  • Weekly assignments in different forms (games, role play, reports, or other)
  • Final assessment (sales situation simulation)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 31.07.2022

  Registration

  15.11.2021 - 09.03.2022

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Juha Ikonen, Elena Grigorova

  Further information for students

  On this course students will learn different techniques for improving their professional sales skills. Students will study different approaches to sales situations and negotiations as well as gain understanding of the sales process. Subject theory runs parallel with the implementation of practical training.
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment
  • Manage a sales process both in b2c and b2b sales situations
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures
  • Understand the importance of necessary preparation work before contacting prospects
  • Fit the offering into the needs of target markets and clients
  • Evaluate, choose and use appropriate sales and negotiation techniques in various sales situations
  • Measure, analyze and improve personal sales skills

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  If a student has extensive sales experience, he/she may earn credits for this course through demonstration of competencies.
  
  Such cases should be discussed with the teachers at the beginning of the course and a formal application should be filed in the CreTa accreditation system.
  
  More information on recognition of prior learning can be found on the Intranet: https://intra.tuni.fi/en/handbook?page=2208.

  Training and labour cooperation

  Guest speakers might be visiting the virtual classes.

  Exam schedule

  There is no exam in this course.
  For more information on evaluation, please see Methods and Grounds for Evaluation.

  International connections

  A view of the assessment of European sales competition (ESC)

  Students use of time and load

  One study credit = 27 hours
  4 credit course = 108 hours
  21 hours of contact teaching
  87 hours of individual work and group exercises

  Content periodicity

  Planned content
  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in a b2c and/or b2b setting?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

•   Professional Selling 3B00DW31-3009 07.03.2022-31.07.2022  4 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to
  
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment.
  • Manage a sales process both in b-to-c and b-to-b sales situations.
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process.
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in b-to-c and b-to-b settings?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other, selected countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

  Approved/Failed

  Not approved 
  
  The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process. 

  Further information

  There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Juha Ikonen

  Recommended or required reading

  Materials will be uploaded to the course Moodle page weekly.
  
  • Shared learning material in Moodle (presentations, articles, videos)
  • Library services for data collection (methods and links)
  • Models for process planning, implementation and evaluation
  • Students' own notes and remarks

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  • Lectures in the virtual classroom
  • Independent studies based on provided materials
  • Sales process simulation assignments, practiced individually and with partners

  Assessment methods and criteria

  The evaluation is based on successful completion of the following tasks and activities:
  • Weekly assignments in different forms (games, role play, reports, or other)
  • Final assessment (sales situation simulation)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  07.03.2022 - 31.07.2022

  Registration

  15.11.2021 - 27.02.2022

  Credits

  4 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Seats

  15 - 40

  Teacher(s)

  Elena Grigorova

  Further information for students

  On this course students will learn different techniques for improving their professional sales skills. Students will study different approaches to sales situations and negotiations as well as gain understanding of the sales process. Subject theory runs parallel with the implementation of practical training.
  
  After completing the course, the student will be able to:
  • Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment
  • Manage a sales process both in b2c and b2b sales situations
  • Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process
  • Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures
  • Understand the importance of necessary preparation work before contacting prospects
  • Fit the offering into the needs of target markets and clients
  • Evaluate, choose and use appropriate sales and negotiation techniques in various sales situations
  • Measure, analyze and improve personal sales skills

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  If a student has extensive sales experience, he/she may earn credits for this course through demonstration of competencies.
  
  Such cases should be discussed with the teachers at the beginning of the course and a formal application should be filed in the CreTa accreditation system.
  
  More information on recognition of prior learning can be found on the Intranet: https://intra.tuni.fi/en/handbook?page=2208.

  Training and labour cooperation

  Guest speakers might be visiting the virtual classes.

  Exam schedule

  There is no exam in this course.
  For more information on evaluation, please see Methods and Grounds for Evaluation.

  International connections

  A view of the assessment of European sales competition (ESC)

  Students use of time and load

  One study credit = 27 hours
  4 credit course = 108 hours
  21 hours of contact teaching
  87 hours of individual work and group exercises

  Content periodicity

  Planned content
  • What are professional sales skills and techniques?
  • How to sell successfully in a b2c and/or b2b setting?
  • What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
  • How to sell and negotiate in other countries?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

  Good

  The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

  Excellent

  The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

•   Professional Swedish for Business, Oral 3B00DW87-3002 30.08.2021-17.12.2021  2 cr  (20ENTRE, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  On this course students will learn about the professional business communication in working life environment. European Framework of Reference for Languages B1 level.
  
  After completing the course students will be able to
  - tell about their personality, education, work experience, tasks and duties at work by using professional Swedish
  - meet customers’ needs when servicing the customer base and communicating with interest groups
  - follow and participate in the development of their field by using different ways of communication (media, conferences, literature).

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What can the student communicate on his/her competence and working life environment in the target language?
  What kind of qualifications does the student need to succeed in multicultural customer-based interaction in the target language?
  How can the student develop his/her competence and acquire business-related information in the target language?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information about a company, product and services. He/she communicates in expected oral work life situations but requires help. The student interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone) and recognises the characteristics of Nordic operational environment. The student interprets the main points of publications of his/her field of study.

  Good

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly. He/she communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected oral work life situations. The student takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment and utilises the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures. He/she communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, oral work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers). The student can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment and utilise, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sari Hanska

  Recommended or required reading

  Kirja: Hanska-Aare Sari, Keränen Marit, Lehtoviita Kirsi, Pirttilä Mia: Gå med vinst! (Edita) ja opettajan lisämateriaali.
  
  Kirjaa on saatavilla myös digitaalisessa muodossa:
  https://shop.edita.fi/tuote/ga-med-vinst-affarssvenska-for-hogskolor-2 (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lähiopetus, argumentointi, esitelmät, yhteistoiminnallinen oppiminen, harjoitukset, suullinen tentti. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Jatkuva näyttö sekä suullinen tentti (ryhmäkeskustelu). Läsnäolo 75 %. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  30.08.2021 - 17.12.2021

  Registration

  02.07.2021 - 03.09.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20ENTRE

  20IB

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Hanska

  Further information for students

  Esitiedot: lukion ruotsi tai vastaavat tiedot. (not translated)

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  - (not translated)

  Training and labour cooperation

  - (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  Suullinen tentti pienryhmissä vko 40/2021.
  Suullisen uusinta sovitaan erikseen. (not translated)

  International connections

  - (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Koko ruotsin kielen 5 opintopisteen opintojakso suoritetaan samanaikaisesti (Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, muntlig 2 op ja Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, skriftlig 3 op). Lähiopetus 60 h ja opiskelijan itsenäinen työskentely 60 h (sis. virtuaaliosuuden). (not translated)

  Content periodicity

  Opetusta lukuvuotena 2021 - 2022 1. ja 2. periodilla. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information of a company, product and services
  * communicates in expected oral work life situations, but requires help
  * interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone)
  * recognises the characteristics of the Nordic operational environment
  * interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly
  * communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected oral work life situations
  * takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment
  * utilizes the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student
  * is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures
  * communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, oral work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers)
  * can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment
  * can utilize, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

•   Professional Swedish for Business, Oral 3B00DW87-3005 10.01.2022-22.04.2022  2 cr  (20ENTRE, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  On this course students will learn about the professional business communication in working life environment. European Framework of Reference for Languages B1 level.
  
  After completing the course students will be able to
  - tell about their personality, education, work experience, tasks and duties at work by using professional Swedish
  - meet customers’ needs when servicing the customer base and communicating with interest groups
  - follow and participate in the development of their field by using different ways of communication (media, conferences, literature).

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What can the student communicate on his/her competence and working life environment in the target language?
  What kind of qualifications does the student need to succeed in multicultural customer-based interaction in the target language?
  How can the student develop his/her competence and acquire business-related information in the target language?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information about a company, product and services. He/she communicates in expected oral work life situations but requires help. The student interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone) and recognises the characteristics of Nordic operational environment. The student interprets the main points of publications of his/her field of study.

  Good

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly. He/she communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected oral work life situations. The student takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment and utilises the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures. He/she communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, oral work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers). The student can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment and utilise, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Joni Sallila

  Recommended or required reading

  Kirja: Hanska-Aare Sari, Keränen Marit, Lehtoviita Kirsi, Pirttilä Mia: Gå med vinst! (Edita) ja opettajan lisämateriaali.
  
  Kirjaa on saatavilla myös digitaalisessa muodossa:
  https://shop.edita.fi/tuote/ga-med-vinst-affarssvenska-for-hogskolor-2 (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lähiopetus, argumentointi, esitelmät, yhteistoiminnallinen oppiminen, harjoitukset, suullinen tentti. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Jatkuva näyttö sekä suullinen tentti (ryhmäkeskustelu). Läsnäolo 75 %. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  10.01.2022 - 22.04.2022

  Registration

  15.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  20ENTRE

  20IB

  Teacher(s)

  Joni Sallila

  Further information for students

  Esitiedot: lukion ruotsi tai vastaavat tiedot. (not translated)

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  - (not translated)

  Training and labour cooperation

  - (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  Suullinen tentti pienryhmissä vko 40/2021.
  Suullisen uusinta sovitaan erikseen. (not translated)

  International connections

  - (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Koko ruotsin kielen 5 opintopisteen opintojakso suoritetaan samanaikaisesti (Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, muntlig 2 op ja Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, skriftlig 3 op). Lähiopetus 60 h ja opiskelijan itsenäinen työskentely 60 h (sis. virtuaaliosuuden). (not translated)

  Content periodicity

  Opetusta lukuvuotena 2021 - 2022 1. ja 2. periodilla. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information of a company, product and services
  * communicates in expected oral work life situations, but requires help
  * interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone)
  * recognises the characteristics of the Nordic operational environment
  * interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly
  * communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected oral work life situations
  * takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment
  * utilizes the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student
  * is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures
  * communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, oral work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers)
  * can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment
  * can utilize, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

•   Professional Swedish for Business, Written 3B00DW89-3002 30.08.2021-17.12.2021  3 cr  (20ENTRE, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  On this course students will learn about the professional business communication in working life environment. European Framework of Reference for Languages B1 level.
  
  After completing the course students will be able to
  - tell about their personality, education, work experience, tasks and duties at work by using professional Swedish
  - meet customers’ needs when servicing the customer base and communicating with interest groups
  - follow and participate in the development of their field by using different ways of communication (media, conferences, literature).

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What can the student communicate on his/her competence and working life environment in the target language?
  What kind of qualifications does the student need to succeed in multicultural customer-based interaction in the target language?
  How can the student develop his/her competence and acquire business-related information in the target language?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information about a company, product and services. He/she communicates in expected written work life situations but requires help. The student interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. e-mail), recognises the characteristics of Nordic operational environment and interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly. He/she communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected written work life situations. He/she is able to interpret and create common business documents (e.g. memo) and take into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment. The student utilises the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures. He/she communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, written work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers).

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Sari Hanska

  Recommended or required reading

  Kirja: Hanska-Aare Sari, Keränen Marit, Lehtoviita Kirsi, Pirttilä Mia: Gå med vinst! (Edita) ja opettajan lisämateriaali.
  Kirjaa on saatavilla myös digitaalisessa muodossa:
  https://shop.edita.fi/tuote/ga-med-vinst-affarssvenska-for-hogskolor-2 (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lähiopetus, argumentointi, opetussimulaatiot ja -pelit, yhteistoiminnallinen oppiminen, harjoitukset, aktivoivat kirjoitustehtävät, referaatti/essee, itsenäinen verkko-opiskelu sekä kirjallinen tentti. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Kirjallisesessa kielitaidossa on kaksi tenttiä (40 % + 40 % arvosanasta) sekä palautettavia kirjallisia harjoituksia (20 % arvosanasta).
  Opintojaksopalaute on pakollinen osasuoritus ja se annetaan opintojaksopalautejärjestelmän kautta.
  Läsnäolo 75 %. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  30.08.2021 - 17.12.2021

  Registration

  02.07.2021 - 03.09.2021

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20ENTRE

  20IB

  Teacher(s)

  Sari Hanska

  Further information for students

  Esitiedot: lukion ruotsi tai vastaavat tiedot. (not translated)

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  1 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  - (not translated)

  Training and labour cooperation

  - (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  Kirjallinen tentti 1: vko 41 / 2021
  Kirjallinen tentti 2: Vkot 49 - 50 / 2021 Tenttiterraario
  Palautettavat ja arvioitavat harjoitukset: palautus 15.12.2021 mennessä.
  Uusinnat kevätlukukaudella 2022 ilmoitetaan myöhemmin. (not translated)

  International connections

  - (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Koko ruotsin kielen 5 opintopisteen opintojakso suoritetaan samanaikaisesti (Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, muntlig 2 op ja Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, skriftlig 3 op). Lähiopetus 60 h ja opiskelijan itsenäinen työskentely 60 h (sis. virtuaaliosuuden). (not translated)

  Content periodicity

  Opetusta lukuvuotena 2021 - 2022 1. ja 4. periodilla. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information of a company, product and services
  * communicates in expected written work life situations, but requires help
  * interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone)
  * recognises the characteristics of the Nordic operational environment
  * interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly
  * communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected written work life situations
  * takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment
  * utilizes the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student
  * is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures
  * communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, written work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers)
  * can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment
  * can utilize, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

•   Professional Swedish for Business, Written 3B00DW89-3005 10.01.2022-22.04.2022  3 cr  (20ENTRE, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  On this course students will learn about the professional business communication in working life environment. European Framework of Reference for Languages B1 level.
  
  After completing the course students will be able to
  - tell about their personality, education, work experience, tasks and duties at work by using professional Swedish
  - meet customers’ needs when servicing the customer base and communicating with interest groups
  - follow and participate in the development of their field by using different ways of communication (media, conferences, literature).

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  What can the student communicate on his/her competence and working life environment in the target language?
  What kind of qualifications does the student need to succeed in multicultural customer-based interaction in the target language?
  How can the student develop his/her competence and acquire business-related information in the target language?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information about a company, product and services. He/she communicates in expected written work life situations but requires help. The student interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. e-mail), recognises the characteristics of Nordic operational environment and interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly. He/she communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected written work life situations. He/she is able to interpret and create common business documents (e.g. memo) and take into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment. The student utilises the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures. He/she communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, written work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers).

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Joni Sallila

  Recommended or required reading

  Kirja: Hanska-Aare Sari, Keränen Marit, Lehtoviita Kirsi, Pirttilä Mia: Gå med vinst! (Edita) ja opettajan lisämateriaali.
  Kirjaa on saatavilla myös digitaalisessa muodossa:
  https://shop.edita.fi/tuote/ga-med-vinst-affarssvenska-for-hogskolor-2 (not translated)

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Lähiopetus, argumentointi, opetussimulaatiot ja -pelit, yhteistoiminnallinen oppiminen, harjoitukset, aktivoivat kirjoitustehtävät, referaatti/essee, itsenäinen verkko-opiskelu sekä kirjallinen tentti. (not translated)

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Kirjallisesessa kielitaidossa on kaksi tenttiä (40 % + 40 % arvosanasta) sekä palautettavia kirjallisia harjoituksia (20 % arvosanasta).
  Opintojaksopalaute on pakollinen osasuoritus ja se annetaan opintojaksopalautejärjestelmän kautta.
  Läsnäolo 75 %. (not translated)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  10.01.2022 - 22.04.2022

  Registration

  16.11.2021 - 15.01.2022

  Credits

  3 cr

  Group(s)

  20ENTRE

  20IB

  Teacher(s)

  Joni Sallila

  Further information for students

  Esitiedot: lukion ruotsi tai vastaavat tiedot. (not translated)

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Virtual proportion

  1 cr

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  - (not translated)

  Training and labour cooperation

  - (not translated)

  Exam schedule

  Kirjallinen tentti 1: xx
  Kirjallinen tentti 2: xx Tenttiterraario
  Palautettavat ja arvioitavat harjoitukset: palautus xx mennessä.
  Uusinnat kevätlukukaudella 2022 ilmoitetaan myöhemmin. (not translated)

  International connections

  - (not translated)

  Students use of time and load

  Koko ruotsin kielen 5 opintopisteen opintojakso suoritetaan samanaikaisesti (Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, muntlig 2 op ja Professionell svenska i handelsbranschen, skriftlig 3 op). Lähiopetus 60 h ja opiskelijan itsenäinen työskentely 60 h (sis. virtuaaliosuuden). (not translated)

  Content periodicity

  Opetusta lukuvuotena 2021 - 2022 3. ja 4. periodilla. (not translated)

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information of a company, product and services
  * communicates in expected written work life situations, but requires help
  * interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone)
  * recognises the characteristics of the Nordic operational environment
  * interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

  Good

  The student
  * is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly
  * communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected written work life situations
  * takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment
  * utilizes the publications of their field of study.

  Excellent

  The student
  * is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures
  * communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, written work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers)
  * can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment
  * can utilize, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

•   Project Management 3B00DV97-3006 18.10.2021-10.12.2021  2 cr  (21IB4, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course introduces the main tools and techniques of project management.
  During this course a virtual project will be defined, initiated and planned by the students.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the purpose of project management
  • Act as member of a project team
  • Write a project plan

  Course contents

  • How to set and initiate a project?
  • How to form a team and define the roles and responsibilities?
  • How to write a professional level project plan?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name and explain project management and its key elements. He/she recognizes the phases of a project and is able to name reasons for having a project mode. The student knows the role of a project plan document and its elements. The student can act as a member of a small-scale project team. The student is able to give and receive feedback related to a set project, collaborate in a small team and take responsibility of his/her own studies.

  Good

  The student is able to apply the basic tools used in projects and structure a small project team with dedicated tasks. The student can explain the needs for setting up a small scale project with a project plan. The student can act as a project manager or a team member to accomplish the project. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop skills for co-operation with dedicated roles. The student takes responsibility of his/her studies and is able to balance the workload of the team.

  Excellent

  The student understands the meaning and relations of the basic concepts of project management. The student analyses multiple alternatives and is able to make sustainable project decisions. He/she is able to connect the project management elements together in a professional manner. The student applies project management tools in a systematic manner and searches and justifies multiple options. The student is able to assess the team and team tasks. He/she finds creative solutions and motivates and develops a project team. The student is able to use feedback to grow professionally in the field and develop creative and constructive working methods. He/she works responsibly towards the project team and commits himself/herself to group work and project management methods beyond the required level.

  ---

  Recommended or required reading

  To be informed during the lectures

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact teaching, individual studies and team working

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  18.10.2021 - 10.12.2021

  Registration

  18.09.2021 - 17.10.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB4

  21IB3

  21IB2

  21IB1

  Seats

  15 - 35

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  To be evaluated on case basis, as the course is strongly focused on team working

  Exam schedule

  The teams set, will implement a virtual web-site project in their study environment

  Students use of time and load

  The work load 1.5 credits is based on an estimate for hours worked during the project

  Content periodicity

  To be specifed and informed in the beginning of the course

•   Project Management 3B00DV97-3007 19.10.2021-10.12.2021  2 cr  (21IB8, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  This course introduces the main tools and techniques of project management.
  During this course a virtual project will be defined, initiated and planned by the students.
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  • Understand the purpose of project management
  • Act as member of a project team
  • Write a project plan

  Course contents

  • How to set and initiate a project?
  • How to form a team and define the roles and responsibilities?
  • How to write a professional level project plan?

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can name and explain project management and its key elements. He/she recognizes the phases of a project and is able to name reasons for having a project mode. The student knows the role of a project plan document and its elements. The student can act as a member of a small-scale project team. The student is able to give and receive feedback related to a set project, collaborate in a small team and take responsibility of his/her own studies.

  Good

  The student is able to apply the basic tools used in projects and structure a small project team with dedicated tasks. The student can explain the needs for setting up a small scale project with a project plan. The student can act as a project manager or a team member to accomplish the project. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop skills for co-operation with dedicated roles. The student takes responsibility of his/her studies and is able to balance the workload of the team.

  Excellent

  The student understands the meaning and relations of the basic concepts of project management. The student analyses multiple alternatives and is able to make sustainable project decisions. He/she is able to connect the project management elements together in a professional manner. The student applies project management tools in a systematic manner and searches and justifies multiple options. The student is able to assess the team and team tasks. He/she finds creative solutions and motivates and develops a project team. The student is able to use feedback to grow professionally in the field and develop creative and constructive working methods. He/she works responsibly towards the project team and commits himself/herself to group work and project management methods beyond the required level.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Recommended or required reading

  To be informed during the lectures

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Contact teaching, individual studies and team working

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  19.10.2021 - 10.12.2021

  Registration

  19.09.2021 - 18.10.2021

  Credits

  2 cr

  Group(s)

  21IB8

  21IB7

  21IB6

  21IB5

  Seats

  15 - 35

  Teacher(s)

  Petteri Vilén

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  Evaluation scale

  0-5

  Completion alternatives

  To be evaluated on case basis, as the course is strongly focused on team working

  Exam schedule

  The teams set, will implement a virtual web-site project in their study environment

  Students use of time and load

  The work load 1.5 credits is based on an estimate for hours worked during the project

  Content periodicity

  To be specifed and informed in the beginning of the course

•   Project Studies 3B00DW93-3002 15.01.2022-22.12.2022  5 cr  (20IB, ...) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  International Business students can carry out a part of their studies as project studies. The projects are defined in advance for the credit count, costs and duration. The projects are commissioned e.g. by local companies or by Tampere University of Applied Sciences. The team projects come from actual companies and the students themselves. See further instructions and required forms at www.wiki.tamk.fi (use "Business Related Project Studies" as a search key there).
  
  After completing the course, the students will be able to:
  
  Work more professionally in real projects, and participate in carrying out systematically managed projects, from project approval and planning to control and implementation.
  Apply and further develop existing disciplinary knowledge in real life cases and projects.
  Use their individual communication, negotiation and group work skills more effectively and efficiently.
  Enhance their use of different sources of information, learning environments, project management software tools, and IT in general.

  Prerequisites and co-requisites

  -

  Course contents

  How can universities and local companies work together?
  What different projects are relevant for university of applied sciences (UAS) students?
  What kind of co-operation will benefit both the student(s) and the client?
  What can a UAS student learn and benefit from participation in a real project?
  How is project management interrelated to the strategic and general management of an organization?
  What are the benefits of applying systematic project management methods and related IT tools for different projects?
  How are projects planned, implemented, controlled and reported successfully?
  What kind of proposed generalizations can be made based on successful project outcomes?

  Assessment criteria

  Approved/Failed

  The Project Studies is an administrative solution to get the students’ various individual business-related project studies and credits registered, as a part of their bachelor’s degree studies. The student can take initiative of the project he/she wants to include to the project studies.
  
  The student is able to plan and implement his/her own project. He/she can reach the pre-set objectives and report the results in writing. He/she is able and willing to receive feedback from the commissioner and supervisor, and analyze the project outcome in conjunction with them.

  Further information

  -

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Recommended or required reading

  Not assigned by TAMK (utilization of earlier project management course material is recommendable).
  
  The student(s) collect their case-specific project learning material independently.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  To learn to act individually, a completely student-driven implementation in which the role of the TAMK instructor is limited only to inform the student about the required project management documentation, approve the student's documents delivered to him/her as well as take care of the grading on the scale pass/fail.
  
  In addition to the grade (S), the student will get the title of his/her performed 1-5 cr project visible on his/her TAMK BBA degree certificate material, when graduating.
  
  The required project documentation:
  1. Project Contract (also called Project Draft)
  2. Project Plan
  3. Project Final Report (including either an integrated or a separate report on the student's actual daily project working hours).

  Assessment methods and criteria

  All the required project documentation is prepared according to this Implementation information and the more detailed project-specific instructions from the responsible TAMK instructor of this course.
  
  As soon as the project final report is approved by the course instructor he/she records the student's ECTS credits together with the Pass/Fail mark onto Pakki.

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  15.01.2022 - 22.12.2022

  Registration

  01.11.2021 - 20.11.2022

  Credits

  5 cr

  Group(s)

  20IB

  22KVHN1

  Teacher(s)

  Pasi Kuusijärvi

  Further information for students

  Pasi Kuusijärvi, M.Sc. (Econ. & Bus. Adm.), AmO, HHJ PJ
  Senior Lecturer, Accounting and Financial Management
  
  Tampere University of Applied Sciences (TAMK)
  Tampere, Finland
  
  pasi.kuusijarvi@tuni.fi
  Tel. +358 40 846 3052
  www.tuni.fi

  Unit, in charge

  International Business

  Degree programme(s)

  Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

  Office

  TAMK Main Campus

  R&D proportion

  5 cr

  Virtual proportion

  5 cr

  Evaluation scale

  Pass/Fail

  Completion alternatives

  No.

  Training and labour cooperation

  Each project has it's own client, external to - or, at least, separate from the degree studies of - the TAMK Degree Programme in International Business.

  Exam schedule

  No written exam.

  International connections

  Possible, project by project.

  Students use of time and load

  There is a strict requirement that in the project final reporting phase the student(s) also report to TAMK his/their actual project working hours, on a daily basis.
  
  Even if the originally assumed size of the project is 5 ECTS credits, the actual final number of ECTS credits to be registered for the student based on the daily report will be 1 - 5 ECTS credits.

  Content periodicity

  Project-specifically.

•   Quantitative methods 3B00FH23-3004 24.01.2022-06.03.2022  3 cr  (20IB) +-
  Learning outcomes of the course unit

  After the course, the student will know
  • the role of statistics in scientific methods
  • the relevant statistical terminology
  • the theory and basic steps of statistical analysis
  After the course, the student will be able to
  • apply the analytical techniques covered in the course
  • present results from statistical analyses

  Course contents

  What does quantitative research mean?
  What does the term statistical significance mean?
  What is probability theory?
  How to choose an appropriate research method?
  How to build a questionnaire?
  How to collect and analyze data?
  How to interpret the results?
  
  The most important quantitative methods will be discussed and practiced in SPSS.

  Assessment criteria

  Satisfactory

  The student can determine and use the concepts and methods of quantitative research. The student takes responsibility for any of his duties in research activities and makes some contribution to a group.

  Good

  The student has the competence of explaining the concepts and methods of quantitative research and applying them in cases of reasonable difficulty. The student works actively, cooperates responsibly and constructively, both individually and in a group. The student can solve the given exercises and problems, as well as interpret the answers for the benefit of business projects and activities.

  Excellent

  The student knows the different approaches very well, can work with quantitative research methods individually. The student can produce correct solutions to research problems, as well as interpret the answers profoundly for the benefit of business projects and activities. The student makes a noticeable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively, and flexibly.

  ---

  Name of lecturer(s)

  Adrián Somlósi-Kovács

  Recommended or required reading

  The e-learning material is available in Moodle.

  Planned learning activities and teaching methods

  Online. The e-learning material is available in Moodle. The contact days and personal consultations are flexible so that the course fits in everybody's timetable.

  Assessment methods and criteria

  Weekly learning diaries - 50%
  Final project - 50%
  a) designing a research question and an online questionnaire, or
  b) other assignment based on personal interest and needs (must be discussed with the teacher by 7th Feb)

  Language of instruction

  English

  Timing

  24.01.2022 - 06.03.2022

  Registration</